Errata

Title & Document Type: 8167B/8D/8E/8F Tunable Laser Source User's Guide
Manual Part Number: 08168-91031
Revision Date: February 1, 1998

HP References in this Manual

This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett-Packard. Please note that HewlettPackard's former test and measurement, semiconductor products and chemical analysis
businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies. We have made no changes to this
manual copy. The HP XXXX referred to in this document is now the Agilent XXXX.
For example, model number HP8648A is now model number Agilent 8648A.
About this Manual
Weve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support your
product. This manual provides the best information we could find. It may be incomplete
or contain dated information, and the scan quality may not be ideal. If we find a better
copy in the future, we will add it to the Agilent website.

Support for Your Product

Agilent no longer sells or supports this product. You will find any other available
product information on the Agilent Test & Measurement website:
www.tm.agilent.com
Search for the model number of this product, and the resulting product page will guide
you to any available information. Our service centers may be able to perform calibration
if no repair parts are needed, but no other support from Agilent is available.

User's Guide

HP 8167B/8D/8E/8F Tunable Laser Source

SERIAL NUMBERS
This guide applies to the 8167B, 8168D, 8168E and 8168F
tunable laser sources. It does not always apply to the 8167A.
Serial numbers of the 8167B begin with the letters DE.

ABCDE
HP Part No. 08168-91031
Printed in Germany
First Edition
E0298

This document contains proprietary

information that is protected by
copyright. All rights are reserved.
No part of this document may be
photocopied, reproduced, or
translated to another language
without the prior written consent of
Hewlett-Packard GmbH.
c Copyright 1997 by:
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Herrenberger Str. 130
71034 Boeblingen
Germany

Subject Matter
The information in this document is
subject to change without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty
of any kind with regard to this
printed material, including, but not
limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and tness for a
particular purpose.

Warranty

Notices

This Hewlett-Packard instrument

product is warranted against defects
in material and workmanship for a
period of one year (8167A and
8168D) or three years (8168E and
8168F) from date of shipment.
During the warranty period, HP will,
at its option, either repair or replace
products that prove to be defective.
For warranty service or repair, this
product must be returned to a service
facility designated by HP. Buyer shall
prepay shipping charges to HP and
HP shall pay shipping charges to
return the product to Buyer.
However, Buyer shall pay all shipping
charges, duties, and taxes for
products returned to HP from
another country.
HP warrants that its software and
rmware designated by HP for use
with an instrument will execute its
programming instructions when
properly installed on that instrument.
HP does not warrant that the
operation of the instrument,
software, or rmware will be
uninterrupted or error free.

Exclusive Remedies
The remedies provided herein are
Buyer's sole and exclusive remedies.
Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable
for any direct, indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential
damages whether based on contract,
tort, or any other legal theory.

Assistance
Product maintenance agreements
and other customer assistance
agreements are available for
Hewlett-Packard products. For any
assistance contact your nearest
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service
Oce.

Certication

Hewlett-Packard Company certies

that this product met its published
specications at the time of
shipment from the factory.
Hewlett-Packard further certies
that its calibration measurements
Hewlett-Packard shall not be liable
are traceable to the United States
for errors contained herein or for
National Institute of Standards and
incidental or consequential damages
Technology, NIST (formerly the
in connection with the furnishing,
United States National Bureau of
performance, or use of this material.
Standards, NBS) to the extent
Limitation of Warranty
Printing History
allowed by the Institutes's
calibration facility, and to the
New editions are complete revisions The foregoing warranty shall not
calibration facilities of other
of the guide re ecting alterations in apply to defects resulting from
the functionality of the instrument. improper or inadequate maintenance International Standards Organization
Updates are occasionally made to by Buyer, Buyer-supplied software or members.
interfacing, unauthorized
the guide between editions. The
ISO 9001 Certication
date on the title page changes when modication or misuse, operation
Produced to ISO 9001 international
an updated guide is published. To outside of the environmental
quality system standard as part of
nd out the current revision of the specications for the product, or
our objective of continually
improper site preparation or
guide, or to purchase an updated
increasing customer satisfaction
guide, contact your Hewlett-Packard maintenance.
through improved process control.
representative.
No other warranty is expressed or
implied. Hewlett-Packard specically
disclaims the implied warranties of
Merchantability and Fitness for a
Particular Purpose.
08168-91031 : First Edition : 1st July 1997 : E0797 : 1st September 1997 : E0997 : 1st February 1998 : E0298

Safety Summary

The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases
of operation, service, and repair of this instrument. Failure to comply with
these precautions or with specic warnings elsewhere in this manual violates
safety standards of design, manufacture, and intended use of the instrument.
Hewlett-Packard Company assumes no liability for the customer's failure to
comply with these requirements.
General This is a Safety Class 1 instrument (provided with terminal for
protective earthing) and has been manufactured and tested according to
international safety standards.
Operation - Before applying power Comply with the installation section.
Additionally, the following shall be observed:
Do not remove instrument covers when operating.
Before the instrument is switched on, all protective earth terminals, extension
cords, auto-transformers and devices connected to it should be connected to a
protective earth via a ground socket. Any interruption of the protective earth
grounding will cause a potential shock hazard that could result in serious
personal injury.
Whenever it is likely that the protection has been impaired, the instrument
must be made inoperative and be secured against any unintended operation.
Make sure that only fuses with the required rated current and of the specied
type (normal blow, time delay, etc.) are used for replacement. The use of
repaired fuses and the short-circuiting of fuseholders must be avoided.
Adjustments described in the manual are performed with power supplied to
the instrument while protective covers are removed. Be aware that energy at
many points may, if contacted, result in personal injury.
Any adjustments, maintenance, and repair of the opened instrument under
voltage should be avoided as much as possible, and when unavoidable, should
be carried out only by a skilled person who is aware of the hazard involved.
Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person, capable
of rendering rst aid and resuscitation is present. Do not replace components
with power cable connected.
Do not operate the instrument in the presence of ammable gases or fumes.
Operation of any electrical instrument in such an enviroment constitutes a
denite safety hazard.
Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modication to
the instrument.
Be aware that capacitors inside the instrument may still be charged even if
the instrument has been disconnected from its source of supply.
iv

Safety Symbols
The apparatus will be marked with this symbol when it is
necessary for the user to refer to the instruction manual in
order to protect the apparatus against damage.
Caution, risk of electric shock.

Frame or chassis terminal.

Protective conductor terminal.
Hazardous laser radiation.

Warning

The WARNING sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to

a procedure, practice or the like, which, if not correctly
performed or adhered to, could result in injury or loss of
life. Do not proceed beyond a WARNING sign until the
indicated conditions are fully understood and met.

Caution

The CAUTION sign denotes a hazard. It calls attention to

an operating procedure, practice or the like, which, if not
correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to
or destruction of part or all of the equipment. Do not proceed
beyond a CAUTION sign until the indicated conditions are fully
understood and met.

Initial Safety Information for the Tunable Laser

Source
The Specications for these instruments are as follows:

HP 8167B HP 8168D HP 8168E HP 8168F

Fabry
Fabry
Fabry
Fabry
Perot-Laser Perot-Laser Perot-Laser Perot-Laser
InGaAsP
InGaAsP
InGaAsP
InGaAsP

Laser Type

Laser Class
According to 21 CFR 1040.20
IIIb
1
1
IIIb
(USA, Canada, Japan)
According to IEC 825-1
3A
3A
3A
3A
(Other countries)
EN 60825-1 Europe
Permissible Output Power (CW)
<9.9mW
<1.6mW
<1.6mW
<9.9mW
Beam Diameter
9m
9m
9m
9m
Numerical Aperture
0.1
0.1
0.1
0.1
Wavelength
1255-1365nm 1490-1565nm 1475-1575nm 1450-1590nm

Note

All Tunable Laser Source modules (8167B, 8168D/68E/68F) use

two LED devices (HLMP-1503) as indicator lamps on the front
panel. These LED devices are measured to be less than AEL
Class 1 Laser Products per EN60825-1 Standard.

Note

USA

Class 1 laser safety warning labels, required for the 8168D

and 8168E in the USA, Canada, or Japan.
vi

Class IIIb stickers, required for 8167B and 8168F in the

USA, Canada, and Japan.

Caution

The use of optical instruments with this product will increase

eye hazard.

Note

Other countries (not USA, Canada, or Japan)

Class 3A stickers, required for all Tunable Laser Sources

outside the USA, Canada, and Japan.

vii

Class 3A Output Power stickers, required for all

Tunable Laser Sources outside the USA, Canada, and
Japan.

Note

A sheet of laser safety warning labels are included with the

instrument. You MUST stick the labels in the local language
onto the outside of the instrument, in a position where they are
clearly visible to anyone using the instrument.

Note

You MUST return instruments with malfunctioning laser boxes

to an HP Service Center for repair and calibration.
The instrument has built in safety circuitry that will disable the
optical output in the case of a fault condition.

Warning

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of

procedures other than those specied for the laser source
may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Warning

Refer Servicing only to qualied and authorized personnel.

Warning

Do not enable the laser when there is no ber attached to

the optical output connector.

viii

The optical output connector is at the bottom right of the

instrument front panel.
The laser is enabled by pressing the gray button beside
the optical output connector on the front panel. The laser
is enabled when the green LED on the front panel of the
instrument is lit.

Warning

Under no circumstances look into the end of an optical

cable attached to the optical output when the device is
operational.
The laser radiation is not visible to the human eye, but it
can seriously damage your eyesight.

ix

Introduction

This guide is arranged into ve categories:

Getting Started
This section gives an introduction to the instrument, and aims to make the
instrument familiar to you: Chapter 1.
Local Control
This is the information on how to control the instrument from the front panel:
Chapters 2 and 3.
Remote Control
This is the information on how to control the instrument over the HP-IB. This
is made of general information for using the HP-IB, a command reference, and
some programming examples.: Chapters 4, 5, and 6.
Additional Information
This is supporting information of a non-operational nature. This contains
installation information, accessories, specications, function tests, cleaning
procedures, and error codes: Appendices A to F.
PACT software
Appendix G gives you information about using the Passive Component Test
Spftware.

Attenuator Some information in this manual applies only to the tunable

laser source with the built in optical attenuator (option 003).

This paragraph is marked the way that all the passages which
only apply to the attenuator option are marked in this manual.

Contents
1. Getting Started
What is a Tunable Laser Source? . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A description of the Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the 8167B or 8168F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Value of a Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Big Changes to a Parameter . . . . . . . . . . .
Making a Small Change to a Parameter . . . . . . . . .
Setting a Parameter to its Default Value . . . . . . . . .
If You Make a Mistake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If the Parameter Will Not Change . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Sample Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the Power of a Modulated Signal . . . . . . .
Setting the Wavelength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Modulated Power . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring a Wavelength Characteristic . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the Wavelength Sweep . . . . . . . . . .
Performing the Wavelength Characteristic Measurement

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

1-1
1-2
1-3
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-11
1-12

2. Setting Wavelength and Power

Setting the Wavelength . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Wavelength Directly . . . . . . . .
Setting a Relative Wavelength . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Base Wavelength . . . . . . . .
Performing a Wavelength Sweep . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Wavelength Sweep . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Maximum Power for the Sweep Range
Executing an Automatic Sweep . . . . . . . . .
Performing a Manual Sweep . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Output Power of a CW Signal . . . .
Setting Power and Attenuation . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2-2
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-6
2-8
2-8
2-9

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Contents-1

What is Excessive Power? . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting a Modulated Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Internal Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Output Power of a Modulated Signal . . .
Setting the Frequency of a Modulated Signal . . . .
The Modulation Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using External Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Output Power of a Modulated Signal . . .
The Modulation Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Coherence Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Output Power of a Coherence Control Signal
The Coherence Control Uncal Power . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

2-9
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-11
2-11
2-12
2-12
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-13
2-14

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

3-1
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-6
3-7
3-7
3-7
3-9
3-9
3-11

4. Programming the Tunable Laser Source

HP-IB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the HP-IB Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Returning the Instrument to Local Control . . . . . . . . . .
How the Tunable Laser Source Receives and Transmits Messages
How the Input Queue Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing the Input Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Output Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

4-1
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4

3. Other Functions
Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings . . . .
Using the System Utilities . . . . . . . . . . .
Switching the Instrument into Stand-By . . . .
Increasing the Lifetime of the Display . . . .
Setting the HP-IB Address . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Modulation Output . . . . . . . .
Getting Information about the Instrument . . .
Setting the Date and Time . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a Selftest . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Power as a Function of Wavelength
Setting the Peak Power . . . . . . . . . . .
Passive Component Test (PACT) . . . . . . . .
Automatic Realignment . . . . . . . . . . .
Secure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . .
Change the Password . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents-2

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

The Error Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Some Notes about Programming and Syntax Diagram Conventions
Short Form and Long Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command and Query Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Remote Commands
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Summary . . . . . . . . . .
The Common Commands . . . . . . . .
Common Status Information . . . . .
SRQ, The Service Request . . . . .
*CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*ESE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*ESE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*ESR? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*IDN? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*OPC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*OPT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*RCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*SAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*SRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*SRE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*STB? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*TST? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*WAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:DISPlay Commands . . . . . . . . . .
:DISPlay:ENABle . . . . . . . . . .
:DISPlay:ENABle? . . . . . . . . .
:LOCK Commands . . . . . . . . . . .
:LOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:LOCK? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:OUTPut Commands . . . . . . . . . .
:OUTPut[:STATe] . . . . . . . . . . .
:OUTPut[:STATe]? . . . . . . . . .
[:SOURce] Commands . . . . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency . .
[:SOURce]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency?
[:SOURce]:AM:SOURce . . . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:AM:SOURce? . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

4-4
4-5
4-5
4-5
5-1
5-2
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-10
5-10
5-11
5-11
5-12
5-12
5-13
5-13
5-14
5-16
5-16
5-16
5-16
5-17
5-17
5-17
5-17
5-17
5-18
5-18
5-18
5-19
5-19
5-19

Contents-3

[:SOURce]:AM:STATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:AM:STATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[:SOURCE]:MODOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[:SOURCE]:MODOUT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation . . . . . . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation? . . . . . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO . . . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO? . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:DARK . . . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:DARK? . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPlitude] . .
[:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPlitude]?
[:SOURce]:POWer:UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:POWer:UNIT? . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:WAVElength[:CWj:FIXED] . . . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:WAVElength[:CWj:FIXED]? . . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:WAVElength:REFerence? . . . . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:WAVElength:REFerence:DISPlay . . . . .
[:SOURce]:WAVElength:FREQuency . . . . . . . . .
[:SOURce]:WAVElength:FREQuency? . . . . . . .
:STATus Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:STATus:OPERation:CONDition? . . . . . . . . . .
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle . . . . . . . . . . . .
:STATus:OPERation:ENABle? . . . . . . . . . . .
:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]? . . . . . . . . . . . .
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition . . . . . . . . . .
:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition? . . . . . . . . .
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition . . . . . . . . . .
:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition? . . . . . . . . .
:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition? . . . . . . . . .
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle . . . . . . . . . . .
:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle? . . . . . . . . .
:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]? . . . . . . . . . .
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition . . . . . . . . .
:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition? . . . . . . .
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition . . . . . . . . .
:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition? . . . . . . .
:STATus:PRESet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:DATe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:DATe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-4

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

5-20
5-20
5-21
5-21
5-22
5-22
5-23
5-23
5-24
5-24
5-25
5-25
5-26
5-26
5-27
5-27
5-28
5-28
5-28
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-31
5-31
5-32
5-32
5-32
5-32
5-33
5-33
5-33
5-34
5-34
5-34
5-35
5-35
5-35
5-36
5-36
5-36

:SYSTem:ERRor? . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:TIMe . . . . . . . . .
:SYSTem:TIMe? . . . . . . .
:TRACe Commands . . . . . . . .
:TRACe:CATalog? . . . . . . .
:TRACe:POINts? <trace name>
:TRACe[:DATa]? <trace name> .
Other Commands . . . . . . . .
WAVEACT . . . . . . . . . . .
Passive Component Test software .
BDATA? nn . . . . . . . . .
DOSMODE . . . . . . . . . . .
DOSMODE? . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

5-36
5-37
5-37
5-37
5-37
5-38
5-38
5-38
5-38
5-40
5-40
5-41
5-41

6. Programming Examples
Example 1 - Checking Communication . . . . . . . .
Example 2 - Status Registers and Queues . . . . . . .
Example 3 - Measuring the Power of a Modulated Signal
Example 4 - Measuring a Wavelength Characteristic . .
Example 5 - Increased Tuning Linearity . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.

6-2
6-3
6-7
6-10
6-12

A. Installation
Safety Considerations . . . . . . . .
Initial Inspection . . . . . . . . . . .
AC Line Power Supply Requirements .
Line Power Cable . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Battery . . . . . . .
Changing the Fuse . . . . . . . . .
Operating and Storage Environment .
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . .
Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Positioning and Cooling .
Switching on the Tunable Laser Source
Self test . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initializing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stabilizing . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stabilizing during Operation . . .
Signal Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . .
Optical Output . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Interface . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

A-1
A-1
A-2
A-2
A-4
A-4
A-6
A-6
A-6
A-6
A-7
A-7
A-7
A-8
A-8
A-9
A-9
A-10
A-10

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

Contents-5

HP-IB Logic Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Claims and Repackaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Return Shipments to HP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. Accessories
Mainframe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 003: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Option 007: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector Interfaces and Other Accessories . . . . . . .
Option 021, Straight Contact Connector . . . . . . . .
Option 022, Angled Contact Connector . . . . . . . .
Option 023, Diamond HMS-10/HRL Angled, Non-Contact
Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HP-IB Cables and Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C. Specications
Denition of Terms . . . . . . . . . . .
Performance Specications . . . . . . . .
Supplementary Performance Characteristics
Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Modulation . . . . . . . . .
External modulation . . . . . . . . .
Coherence Control . . . . . . . . . .
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Polarization maintaining ber . . . . .
HP-IB Interface . . . . . . . . . . .
Passive Component Test Software . . .
Laser Class . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental . . . . . . . . . . .
Listed options . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Specications . . . . . . . . . . .
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . .

Contents-6

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

A-11
A-12
A-12

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

B-1
B-2
B-2
B-2
B-2
B-3
B-4

. .
. .

B-6
B-7

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

C-1
C-4
C-7
C-7
C-7
C-7
C-7
C-7
C-7
C-7
C-8
C-8
C-8
C-8
C-9
C-9
C-10

D. Performance Tests
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment Required . . . . . . .
Test Record . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Failure . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Specication . . . . .
Wavelength Tests . . . . . . . .
Relative Wavelength Accuracy .
Wavelength Repeatability . . .
Power Tests . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum Output Power . . . .
Power Linearity . . . . . . . .
Power Flatness over Wavelength
Power Stability . . . . . . . .
Source Spontaneous Emission . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

D-1
D-1
D-2
D-3
D-3
D-3
D-4
D-5
D-6
D-7
D-10
D-14
D-15
D-16

E. Cleaning Procedures
The Cleaning Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Cleaning Tools . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preserving Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Instrument Housings . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Cable Connectors . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Connector Adapters . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Connector Interfaces . . . . . . .
Cleaning Bare Fiber Adapters . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Bare Fiber Ends . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Large Area Lenses and Mirrors . . .
Cleaning Fixed Connector Interfaces . . . .
Cleaning Optical Glass Plates . . . . . . . .
Cleaning Physical Contact Interfaces . . . .
Cleaning Recessed Lens Interfaces . . . . .
Cleaning Fragile Optical Devices . . . . . .
Cleaning Metal Filters or Attenuator Gratings

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

E-1
E-3
E-4
E-4
E-5
E-5
E-6
E-7
E-8
E-8
E-9
E-10
E-11
E-11
E-11
E-12
E-12
E-13

Contents-7

F. Error Messages
Display Messages . . . . .
HP-IB Messages . . . . . .
Instrument Specic Errors
Command Errors . . . . .
Execution Errors . . . .
Device-Specic Errors . .
Query Errors . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.

G. The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
What is the Passive Component Test Software? . . . . . . . .
Starting the Passive Component Test Software . . . . . . . . .
Getting Help while Using the System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Loss Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making the Loss Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the Device Under Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Looking at the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example, Measuring the Characteristic of a Fabry-Perot Resonator
Making Return Loss Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making the Return Loss Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the Reference Re ection . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the Termination Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . .
Including or Excluding the Termination Parameter . . . . .
Measuring the Termination Parameter . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the Device Under Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Looking at the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example, Measuring the Return Loss of a Fabry-Perot Resonator
Making Loss Ratio Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making the Loss Ratio Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contents-8

F-1
F-3
F-3
F-3
F-6
F-7
F-8
G-1
G-1
G-1
G-2
G-3
G-3
G-4
G-5
G-6
G-7
G-8
G-8
G-8
G-12
G-12
G-13
G-15
G-16
G-17
G-17
G-18
G-18
G-18
G-19
G-20
G-25
G-25
G-26
G-28
G-29
G-30

Measuring the Device Under Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Looking at the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example, Measuring the Characteristic of a Wavelength Division
Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing Your Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up the Printer in Software . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Layout of the Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the X- or Y-Axis Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Editing Text for a Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Change the Cursor Position in the Text . . . . . . . . .
To Change between Overwriting and Inserting . . . . . . .
To Put Characters into the Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To End the Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Showing the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Result to Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Non-Standard Other Results . . . . . . . . . . .
Previewing the Results on the Display . . . . . . . . . . .
Making Readings from the Results . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printing the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example, Printing Results of Loss against Wavelength . . . . .
Saving Your Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Formatting a Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving a Measurement or Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Measurement or Result to Save . . . . . . . .
Saving the Measurement or Result . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving to Your Own Filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Replace a Filename . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Change the Cursor Position in the Filename . . . . . . .
To Change between Overwriting and Inserting . . . . . . .
To Put Characters into the Filename . . . . . . . . . . .
To End the Edit and Save the Measurement or Result . . .
Loading a Measurement or Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example, Moving Termination Data to the DUT Data Area . . .
Using Data on a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If the Data is Already On Your PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

G-30
G-31
G-32
G-36
G-37
G-37
G-38
G-39
G-39
G-41
G-41
G-42
G-42
G-42
G-43
G-43
G-43
G-43
G-44
G-44
G-45
G-46
G-47
G-51
G-52
G-53
G-53
G-54
G-54
G-54
G-54
G-55
G-55
G-55
G-56
G-57
G-58
G-60
G-61

Contents-9

If the Data is On the Memory Card in your Tunable Laser

Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Developing Your Own Converter . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading .SLK Files into a Spreadsheet . . . . . . . . . .
Microsoft Excel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Borland Quattro Pro/Windows . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lotus 1-2-3W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Code Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Result and Measurement Data Format . . . . . . . . . .
Backdating Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Index

Contents-10

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

. G-61
. G-62
. G-62
. G-62
. G-62
. G-62
. G-62
. G-65
. G-71

Figures
1-1.
1-2.
1-3.
1-4.
1-5.
1-6.
1-7.
1-8.
1-9.
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
2-11.
2-12.
2-13.
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
3-6.

The Tunable Laser Source Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . .

Starting Screen for the 8167B/8168F . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\Secure: Unlock Instrument" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . .
\Secure" Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Summary of the Help Hard- and Softkeys . . . . . . . . . .
The Help Topics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connecting the Instruments for the Sample Session . . . . . .
Tunable Laser Source Display after Setting Up Wavelength and
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tunable Laser Source Display during Setting Up for the
Wavelength Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Summary of the additional Output Power Softkeys for the
Attenuator Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Wavelength Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting a Relative Wavelength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up for a Wavelength Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Parameters for a Wavelength Sweep . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing a Manual Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Output Power of a CW Signal . . . . . . . . . . .
The Modulated Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Output Power of an Internally Modulated Signal . .
External Modulation and Output Power . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting the Output Power of an Externally Modulated Signal . .
Setting the Output Power of a Coherence Controlled Signal . . .
The Coherence Control Uncalibrated Power and the Maximum
Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User Setting Number 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of the Setting Hard- and Softkeys . . . . . . . . . .
The System Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of the System Hard- and Softkeys . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Functions (8168D/E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Functions (8167B and 8168F) . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-9
1-11
1-12
2-2
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-7
2-8
2-11
2-11
2-12
2-13
2-14
2-14
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-6
3-6

Contents-11

3-7.
3-8.
3-9.
3-10.
3-11.
3-12.
3-13.
3-14.
5-1.
5-2.
6-1.
6-2.
6-3.
A-1.
A-2.
A-3.
A-4.
A-5.
A-6.
A-7.
B-1.
B-2.
B-3.
B-4.
C-1.
D-1.
D-2.
D-3.
D-4.
D-5.
G-1.
G-2.
G-3.
G-4.
G-5.
G-6.
G-7.
G-8.
G-9.

Auto Realignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-8
\Secure" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-9
\Secure: Lock Instrument" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
\Secure" screen - instrument is locked . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
\Secure: Unlock Instrument" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
\Secure: Change Password" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
\Secure: Change Password": Enter new password . . . . . . . 3-11
\Secure: Change Password": Enter new password again . . . . 3-11
Common Status Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-6
The Status Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Connecting the Instruments for the Sample Session . . . . . .
6-8
Measurement setup for Increased Tuning Linearity . . . . . . 6-12
Flow chart describing Increased Tuning Linearity program. . . . 6-13
Line Power Cables - Plug Identication . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Rear Panel Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-4
Releasing the Fuse Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
The Fuse Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-5
Correct Positioning of the Tunable Laser Source . . . . . . . . A-7
PMF Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
HP-IB Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Tunable Laser Source Options Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Tunable Laser Source Option 021 Conguration . . . . . . . . B-3
Tunable Laser Source Option 022 Conguration . . . . . . . . B-5
Tunable Laser Source Option 023 Conguration . . . . . . . . B-6
Maximum Specied Output Power for 8168D, E and F (without
options) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
Test Setup for the Wavelength Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Test Setup for the Maximum Output Power Test (HP 8168D,E) . D-8
Test Setup for the Maximum Output Power Test (HP 8167B and
8168F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
Test Setup for the Power Tests (except Maximum Output Power) D-11
Test Setup for the Source Spontaneous Emission Test . . . . . . D-17
The Main Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
A Summary of the Help Hard- and Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . G-2
The Help Topics Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
Hardware Set-Up for a Loss Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . G-3
A Summary of the Loss Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-4
The Loss Measurement Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-5
The Set Power Meter Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
The Parameters for a Wavelength Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
Measuring the Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7

Contents-12

G-10.
G-11.
G-12.
G-13.
G-14.
G-15.
G-16.
G-17.
G-18.
G-19.
G-20.
G-21.
G-22.
G-23.
G-24.
G-25.
G-26.
G-27.
G-28.
G-29.
G-30.
G-31.
G-32.
G-33.
G-34.
G-35.
G-36.
G-37.
G-38.
G-39.
G-40.
G-41.
G-42.

Test Set-Up to Characterize a Fabry-Perot Resonator . . . . .

Hardware Set-Up for a Return Loss Measurement . . . . . .
A Summary of the Return Loss Softkeys . . . . . . . . . .
The Return Loss Measurement Display . . . . . . . . . . .
The Set Power Meter Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Parameters for a Wavelength Sweep . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the Reference Re ection . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the Termination Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Set-Up to Measure the Reference Re ection . . . . . . .
Test Setup for Measuring the Termination Parameter . . . . .
Test Setup for Measuring the Fabry-Perot Resonator . . . . .
Hardware Setup for a Loss Ratio Measurement . . . . . . .
A Summary of the Loss Ratio Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . .
The Loss Ratio Measurement Display . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Set Power Meter Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Parameters for a Wavelength Sweep . . . . . . . . . .
Measuring the Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Setup to Measure the Reference for Channel A . . . . .
Test Setup to Characterize a Wavelength Division Multiplexer .
The Show Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Summary of the Show Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Printer Hardware Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Show Setting Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Layout of the Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Edit Text Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Show Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making an Absolute Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Making a Relative Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Set-Up to Print Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Memory Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Summary of the Memory Softkeys . . . . . . . . . . . .
The MemSave Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The Show Text Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

G-9
G-13
G-14
G-14
G-15
G-16
G-17
G-18
G-20
G-23
G-23
G-25
G-27
G-27
G-28
G-29
G-30
G-32
G-35
G-36
G-37
G-38
G-38
G-40
G-42
G-43
G-45
G-46
G-47
G-51
G-52
G-54
G-54

Contents-13

Tables
4-1.
5-1.
5-2.
5-3.
5-4.
5-5.
5-6.
6-1.
A-1.

HP-IB Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Units and Allowed Mnemonics . . . . . . . . .
Common Command Summary . . . . . . . . . .
Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset State (Default Setting) . . . . . . . . . .
Specied Wavelength range . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Description: Increased Tuning Linearity
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Contents-14

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.

4-2
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-12
5-27
5-40
6-16
A-6

1
Getting Started
This chapter gives you basic information on how you can operate the tunable
laser source from the front panel.

What is a Tunable Laser Source?

A tunable laser source is a laser source for which the wavelength is not xed.
The Hewlett-Packard tunable laser sources also allow you to set the output
power, and to choose between continuous wave or modulated output power.

Note

The single greatest factor aecting the performance of the

tunable laser source, as with all ber optic measurements, is the
cleanliness of the connectors. Ensure that your connectors are
always clean. For cleaning instructions, see Appendix E.

Getting Started 1-1

A description of the Front Panel

Figure 1-1. The Tunable Laser Source Front Panel

A softkey is a key whose function changes depending on the keys that you have
pressed before. The function of a softkey is shown on the display above the
softkey.
The memory card drive allows you to load replacement, or additional, software
to increase the capabilities of your tunable laser source.
There are six function keys. These allow you
to set the wavelength, or to perform a wavelength sweep.
to set the output power,
to save the wavelength and output power setting,
to check or change the system conguration: to test the instrument, to switch
o the laser and display, to change the HP-IB Address, to select whether the
internal modulation signal is available at the Modulation Output constantly,
or only when the power is being output, or to get information about the
instrument and the software revision,
to get help information (see \Getting Help" in the next section of this
chapter), or
to perform an auxiliary application such as examine the power characteristic,
or to set the instrument for maximum power output.
The numeric keypad, the cursor keys, and the modify knob are used to edit
parameters.
1-2 Getting Started

The modulation output gives a TTL level signal of the same frequency as the
internal modulating signal.
The modulation input allows you to input a signal to modulate the power of the
optical output.
The analog output gives a dc-signal proportional to the output power. The
relationship between this voltage level and the output power is not calibrated,
but is approximately 1mV for each 1W.
At the back of the 8167B and 8168F, you also have a Remote Interlock
Connector. This is to protect the user from injury. If the short-circuit at this
BNC connector is opened, the laser is switched o immediately and cannot be
switched on until it is closed again.

Starting the 8167B or 8168F

When you turn on the 8167B or the 8168F, the instrument is locked. This is to
prevent unauthorized persons from using this Laser Safety Class IIIb instrument.
The Starting screen for the 8167B/8168F is shown below:

Figure 1-2. Starting Screen for the 8167B/8168F

If you have not set a new password, you also see the message:
default pwd: 8167, please change it! (8167B), or
default pwd: 8168, please change it! (8168F).
This message appears in the \Secure" screen until you set a new password (see
\Secure" in Chapter 3).
To unlock the instrument, press Unlock . You see the following screen:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Getting Started 1-3

Figure 1-3. \Secure: Unlock Instrument" Screen

Enter the 4-gure password using the DATA keys. The default password is 8167
(8167B) or 8168 (8168F), although you can change this from the AUX menu (see
\Secure" in Chapter 3).
When you enter the correct password, the instrument is unlocked, and you see
the following screen:

Figure 1-4. \Secure" Screen

Press

Exit , or any of the function keys, to view the main screen.

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

1-4 Getting Started

Getting Help

Press 4 5 to get help.

When you press this key, the rst help screen is displayed, this is either the last
screen that was used, or the screen with the limit values for the parameters.
HELP

Figure 1-5. A Summary of the Help Hard- and Softkeys

Press

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Search

to get the help topics menu.

Figure 1-6. The Help Topics Menu

Choose a topic using " and # , or the Modify Knob. Press Select , or 4
to get the information.
Press Close to close the help topics menu without selecting a topic.
Many of the help texts are longer than one screen. You move between screens
of information using " and # .
NNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

ENTER5

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNN

Getting Started 1-5

Changing the Value of a Parameter

What follows is a description of the various methods of changing the value of

parameters on the tunable laser source. Examples in which actual parameter
values are changed are given with the parameter descriptions.

Making Big Changes to a Parameter

If you are changing the value of a parameter completely, you can directly type
in the value on the keypad, and press 4
5.
Example
To change the output power from 200W to 1025W.
1. Press 4
5. The cursor moves to P on the right
hand side of the display.
ENTER

OUTPUT POWER

:1540.000nm

P: 200W

2. Type the new value for the output power on the numeric
keypad.
:1540.000nm

3. Press 4

ENTER5

P:1025W

to end the editing.

Making a Small Change to a Parameter

For small changes to a parameter use 4 5, or the Modify Knob.

Select the parameter and then:
1. Press 4 5, 4(5. 4)5, or turn the Modify Knob slightly. If you start with
Modify Knob the cursor moves to the digit that was most recently changed.
If no digit was changed before, or if you started with another key, the cursor
moves to the position of the most signicant digit of the parameter.
2. If you want to move the cursor and select another digit to edit, use 4(5 and
4)5.
EDIT

EDIT

1-6 Getting Started

3. Enter the new value for the digit at the cursor on the keypad, or by turning
the Modify Knob. If you have entered the value from the keypad, the cursor
moves to the next digit.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to continue editing the value.
5. The edited value
5. When you have nished editing the value, press 4
becomes the new value of the parameter.
Example
To change the wavelength from 1540.000nm to 1542.500nm.
5. The cursor moves to  on the left hand
1. Press 4
side of the display.
ENTER

WAVELENGTH

:1540.000nm

P: 200W

2. Press 4 5. The cursor moves to the most signicant digit of

the wavelength value.
EDIT

:1540.000nm

P: 200W

3. Press 4)5 three times to move to the cursor to the units

digit. Press 4 5 on the numeric keypad. The units digit
changes, and the cursor moves to the next digit.
2

:1542.000nm

P: 200W

4. Press 4 5 on the numeric keypad, to change the tenths digit.

5 to end the editing.
Press 4
5

ENTER

:1542.500nm

P: 200W

Setting a Parameter to its Default Value

There is a default softkey that you can use to set a parameter to its default
value.
1. Press 4 5.
2. Press Default .
EDIT

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Getting Started 1-7

If You Make a Mistake

If you make a mistake while you are editing a parameter, you can cancel the
editing, and get the previous value for the parameter back by pressing Cancel .
Alternatively, you can press Clear and type in the parameter again.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

If the Parameter Will Not Change

5 after editing, the tunable laser source returns

If, when you press 4
immediately to the previous value for the parameter, then the value you tried to
enter is outside the calibrated range. Press 4 5, and select the Input Limits
help topic to see the calibrated range.
ENTER

HELP

A Sample Session

There are two short tasks in this sample session. The rst is to measure the
power of a modulated signal at a single wavelength, and then a wavelength
characteristic at a xed power.
The sample session is written for an HP 8168E/F Tunable Laser Source, and
an HP 8153A Lightwave Multimeter with an HP 81532A Power Sensor (It
is assumed that the power sensor is inserted in channel A). To perform the
sample session as described here, you also need a connector interface for the
multimeter (for example, an HP 81000AI), and a patchcord (if you are using
the HP 81000AI, then a Diamond HMS-10/HP/HRL to Diamond HMS-10/HP
patchcord, HP 81109AC).
These same procedures are repeated in \Example 3 - Measuring the Power of
a Modulated Signal" in Chapter 6 and \Example 4 - Measuring a Wavelength
Characteristic" in Chapter 6, where they are performed using the HP-IB.

Measuring the Power of a Modulated Signal

We want to measure the power of a 1540nm signal, modulated by a 100kHz

square wave, at 500W.
1. Make sure that all your connectors and connector interfaces are clean.
2. Make sure that the Optical Output on the laser source is not Active.
1-8 Getting Started

3. Connect the output of the laser source to the input of the power sensor (as
shown in the gure below). Make sure that the connector with the orange
strain-relief sleeve is connected to the tunable laser source (the orange
sleeve indicates an angled connector).

Figure 1-7. Connecting the Instruments for the Sample Session

Typically, you would connect a component to test between the tunable laser
source and the power meter.
4. Make sure that both instruments are powered up.

Note

Normally you also need to be sure that the instruments are

properly warmed up before using the source, or making any
measurements. Here, because the measurements are not critical,
it is okay to proceed immediately to the next step.

Setting the Wavelength

5. On the tunable laser source:

a. Press 4
5.
b. Make sure that you are setting the wavelength directly.
(Press nm/GHz if necessary until there is only one parameter () shown
on the left side of the display).
c. Press 4 5 and then Default to set the wavelength to 1540.000nm.
WAVELENGTH

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

EDIT

Getting Started 1-9

6. On the multimeter set the wavelength for the power sensor to 1540.0nm,
set the measurement averaging time to 1s
(4 5!A; 4 5!MEAS; 4 5!!1540.0nm; 4 5!T!1s).
Chan

Mode

Param

Param

Setting the Modulated Power

7. On the tunable laser source:

a. Press 4
5.
b. Make sure that you have a modulated signal selected
(Press Mod/CW if necessary until there are two parameters (POWER and
FREQ) shown on the right side of the display).
c. Make sure that POWER is selected
(the label of the selected parameter is displayed in inverse, press Power
if it is not selected).
d. Make sure that the power is being shown in Watts
(if necessary, press W/dBm to change the units).
5.
e. Type 500 on the keypad and press 4
8. On the multimeter, make sure that Watts are selected and that the
instrument is autoranging
5!AUTO).
5!W; 4
(4
9. On the tunable laser source:
a. Press Freq .
b. Type in 100 on the keypad.
c. Make sure that the units are set to kHz
(If necessary, press Hz/kHz to change the units).
d. Press 4
5.
OUTPUT POWER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

ENTER

Auto

dBm/W

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

ENTER

1-10 Getting Started

Figure 1-8.
Tunable Laser Source Display after Setting Up Wavelength and Power

10. Press the button beside the Optical Output, the green LED should be lit to
indicate that the laser is now active.
You should notice that the power reading on the multimeter is approximately
half the value set on the laser source. This is because the output is modulated
by a square wave with a 50% duty cycle.

Measuring a Wavelength Characteristic

For the second part, we assume that the instruments are in the state given after
the rst task (see Figure 1-8).
We now want to measure the wavelength characteristic by measuring the power
at 1nm steps between 1535nm and 1545nm, at the highest power level possible
that is available over the full sweep range.
11. On the laser source, press Mod/CW to return the laser source to CW
operation.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Setting Up the Wavelength Sweep

12. On the laser source:

5,and then -Sweep .
a. Press 4
b. Type in 1535 on the keypad and press 4
for the sweep.
c. Type in 1545 on the keypad and press 4
for the sweep.
d. Type in 1 on the keypad and press 4
wavelength step for the sweep.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

WAVELENGTH

ENTER5

to set the start wavelength

ENTER5

to set the stop wavelength

ENTER5

to set the size of the

Getting Started 1-11

Figure 1-9.
Tunable Laser Source Display during Setting Up for the Wavelength
Sweep

e. Press # to skip over the dwell parameter.

f. Type in 1 on the keypad and press 4
5 to set the number of times
that the sweep is to be performed.
13. On the laser source, press Pmax!P to set the output power to the highest
value that can be maintained for the full sweep range.
14. On the power meter:
a. Set  to 1535nm
(4 5!!1535.0nm).
b. Make sure that the parameter cursor is in the units position (that is, at
the second \5").
NNNNN

ENTER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Param

Performing the Wavelength Characteristic Measurement

15.
16.
17.
18.

Make sure that the laser source is still active.

On the laser source, press Manual .
Read the value for the power at 1535nm on the multimeter.
Repeat the following steps at each wavelength in the sweep range
a. On the laser source, press Next .
b. On the multimeter, increment  (press 4*5).
c. Read the value for the power at the wavelength on the multimeter.
19. On the laser source, press Stop to end the sweep.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

1-12 Getting Started

This procedure can be used in practice to measure the wavelength characteristic

of a component.

Getting Started 1-13

2
Setting Wavelength and Power
This chapter describes how to set the wavelength and the power of the output.

A Summary of the Wavelength and Output Power Hard- and

Softkeys

Setting Wavelength and Power 2-1

Figure 2-1.
A Summary of the additional Output Power Softkeys for the
Attenuator Option

Setting the Wavelength

There are three ways to set the wavelength of the tunable laser source.
You can set the wavelength () directly,
You can set the wavelength from a base wavelength and an oset in the
frequency domain, or
You can set a range of wavelengths for the instrument to \sweep"
5 to select the wavelength parameter.
Press 4
Use nm/GHz to select how you set the wavelength.
WAVELENGTH

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Use -Sweep to perform a wavelength sweep.

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Setting the Wavelength Directly

You can set the wavelength directly if the display looks like this:

Figure 2-2. Setting the Wavelength Directly

2-2 Setting Wavelength and Power

Press 4
5 and nm/GHz as necessary to get this display.
See \Changing the Value of a Parameter" in Chapter 1 if you need details on
how to edit parameters.
Example
To set the wavelength to 1505.500nm (on an HP 8168E/F)
1. Press 4
5
2. Press nm/GHz , if necessary, until the display looks as shown
in Figure 2-2
3. Type in 1505.5 on the numeric keypad, and press 4
5.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

WAVELENGTH

WAVELENGTH

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

ENTER

Setting a Relative Wavelength

You use a relative wavelength for heterodyning, for example, when you are
measuring the linewidth of DFB (distributed feedback) lasers.
You can set a relative wavelength if the display looks like this:

Figure 2-3. Setting a Relative Wavelength

5 and nm/GHz as necessary to get to this display.
Press 4
The output wavelength () is set from the base wavelength (0 ) and the
frequency oset (df). The formula for calculating the output wavelength is:
c
=
( )df + c 0
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

WAVELENGTH

where c is the speed of light in a vacuum (2.9982108 ms-1 ).

You can edit only the value of df directly. See \Changing the Value of a
Parameter" in Chapter 1 if you need details on how to edit parameters.

Changing the Base Wavelength

If you want to change 0 ,

1. set  to the value to which you want to set the base wavelength (by
calculating df, or by setting the wavelength directly) and then
Setting Wavelength and Power 2-3

2. press !0 .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Set the base wavelength to 1540.000nm, and then set df, so

that the output wavelength is 1507.5nm (on an HP 8168E/F)
1. Press 4
5.
2. Press nm/GHz until the screen looks as shown in Figure 2-2
(that is, to set the wavelength directly).
3. Press 4 5 and then Default .
4. Press nm/GHz , to set a relative wavelength.
5. Press !0
The base wavelength is now set.
6. Calculate the value for df
c
c
2:998E 8 0 2:998E 8 = 4196:980GHz
df = 0
=
 
1507:500E 0 9 1540:000E 0 9

Example

WAVELENGTH

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

EDIT

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

7. Type in the value for df (4197.0) on the numeric keypad, and

5.
press 4
8. Because of inaccuracies in the value taken for the speed of
light, this gives a  value of 1507.499nm. Use the Modify
Knob to edit the value for df to get =1507.5nm
ENTER

Performing a Wavelength Sweep

You can perform a wavelength sweep when the screen looks like this

Figure 2-4. Setting Up for a Wavelength Sweep

Press 4

WAVELENGTH5

and -Sweep as necessary to get this display.

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

2-4 Setting Wavelength and Power

Setting the Wavelength Sweep

There are ve parameters for the wavelength sweep,

start, the wavelength with which the sweep begins,
stop, the wavelength at which the sweep ends,
step, the size of the change in wavelength for each step,
dwell, the amount of time spent at the wavelength during each step, and
cycles, the number of times the sweep is repeated.

Figure 2-5. The Parameters for a Wavelength Sweep

You move from one parameter to the next, using " and # , the Modify Knob, or
4
5. Only three of the parameters can be displayed at a time, you scroll the
other parameters onto the display.
See \Changing the Value of a Parameter" in Chapter 1 if you need details on
how to edit parameters.
NNNNN

NNNNN

ENTER

Setting the Maximum Power for the Sweep Range

Pmax!P sets the power to the maximum for the selected sweep range.
Alternatively, you can set a power level in the way described in \Setting the
Power".

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Setting Wavelength and Power 2-5

Note

If coherence control is enabled, and the uncal power level

cannot be exceeded for the full wavelength range chosen, the
wavelength range is reduced as necessary.

Executing an Automatic Sweep

You can perform an automatic sweep if you press Auto after setting up the
sweep parameters, or if you press Cont during a manual sweep.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Press Pause to interrupt the sweep. The instrument switches to a manual

sweep (see \Performing a Manual Sweep").
Press Stop to end the sweep.
Example
Set the instrument to sweep the range 1495nm to 1555nm,
three times, in 1nm steps, stopping for half a second at
each wavelength, at the highest power level available at all
wavelengths.
1. Press 4
5 and then -Sweep .
2. Make sure you are at the start parameter.
5, to set the start wavelength.
3. Type in 1495 and then 4
5, to set the stop wavelength.
4. Type in 1555 and then 4
5, to set the step size.
5. Type in 1 and then 4
5, to set the dwell time.
6. Type in 0.5 and then 4
7. Type in 3 and then 4
5, to set the number of cycles.
8. Press Pmax!P , to set the power.
9. Enable the optical output, if necessary.
10. Press Auto , to run the application.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

WAVELENGTH

ENTER
ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

ENTER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Performing a Manual Sweep

You can perform a manual sweep if you press Manual after setting up the
sweep parameters, or if you press Pause during an automatic sweep. During a
manual sweep the display looks as follows:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

2-6 Setting Wavelength and Power

Figure 2-6. Performing a Manual Sweep

Press

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

to move on to the next wavelength step.

Press

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

to move back to the previous wavelength step.

Press

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

to continue with an automatic sweep, from the current wavelength.

Press

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

to end the sweep.

Next

Prev
Cont

Stop

Setting Wavelength and Power 2-7

Setting the Power

The laser output can be either

a continuous wave (CW), xed-amplitude signal,
a modulated signal, or
a signal with increased linewidth (coherence control).

Attenuator If you have the built in attenuator, there are two power modes

for both the xed-amplitude, the modulated, and the increased

linewidth signals. You can either
specify the output power (Power Mode), or
specify the laser power and the attenuation (Attenuation
Mode).
The two modes are separate, the values set in one mode do not
aect the values set in the other.

5 to select the output power parameter. Use

Press 4
choose CW, modulated, or coherence control.
OUTPUT POWER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Mod/CW

to

Attenuator If you have the optional attenuator installed, use PowMode to

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

choose between Power Mode (specifying the output power) and

Attenuation Mode (specifying the laser power and attenuation).

Setting the Output Power of a CW Signal

You can set the output power of a CW signal if the display looks like this:

Figure 2-7. Setting the Output Power of a CW Signal

Press 4

OUTPUT POWER5

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Mod/CW

2-8 Setting Wavelength and Power

and

NNNNNNNN

CW

as necessary to get to this display.

See \Changing the Value of a Parameter" in Chapter 1 if you need details on

how to edit parameters.
You can change the units by pressing W/dBm .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Attenuator If you have the optional attenuator installed, you may need to
press

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

PowMode

to get the display shown above.

Setting Power and Attenuation

Attenuator If you have the optional attenuator installed, you can also set

the output power by setting rst the laser output power, and
then setting the amount of attenuation.
Press PowMode from the screen shown in Figure 2-7 to change
to the Attenuation Mode.
Press Att to select the attenuation parameter. Press Pref to
select the laser output power.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

What is Excessive Power?

An EXCESSIVE message indicates that the value you have set for the output
power is larger than the laser diode is capable of producing at this wavelength.
The instrument sets the output power as high as possible; it is this actual output
power that is shown as part of the EXCESSIVE message.

Note

If the chosen value is simultaneously too low for the coherence

control, if you are also using this, the EXCESSIVE is shortened
to EXC.

The Analog Output

The Analog Output, on the front panel of the instrument, outputs a dc level
that is proportional to the laser output power. The relationship between this
voltage level and the output power is not calibrated, but is approximately 1mV
for each 1W.
Setting Wavelength and Power 2-9

Attenuator If you have the optional attenuator installed, the Analog Output

signal depends on the power mode you have chosen.

In Power Mode the laser output power, and therefore the
Analog Output signal, is not linearly proportional to the output
power. This is because the actual output optical power is
derived by the optimum combination of the laser output power
and the attenuation.
In Attenuation Mode the relationship between the Pref and
the voltage level is approximately 1.35mV for each 1W. (The
dierence between this value and that of the tunable laser
source without the attenuator is due to the insertion loss of the
attenuator). This value is only proportional to the output power
if the attenuation remains constant. Here, the attenuator adds a
constant oset to the voltage level.

Example

To set the power to -10dBm.

5.
1. Press 4
2. Press Mod/CW , and CW if necessary, so that the display looks
as shown in Figure 2-7.
3. Press W/dBm , if necessary, so that the power is displayed in
dBm.
5.
4. Type -10 on the numeric keypad, and press 4
OUTPUT POWER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

ENTER

Setting a Modulated Signal

There are two ways of modulating the amplitude of the optical output.
Using the internal modulation, and
using external modulation.

2-10 Setting Wavelength and Power

Using the Internal Modulation

The internal modulating source is a square wave with a 50% duty-cycle. You can
set both the amplitude and the frequency of this signal. The amplitude is set by
the power parameter. This is the maximum output power of the output signal;
at the minimum, nothing is output.

Figure 2-8. The Modulated Signal

Setting the Output Power of a Modulated Signal

You can set the output power of a modulated signal if the display looks like this:

Figure 2-9. Setting the Output Power of an Internally Modulated Signal

5, Mod/CW , and Int as necessary to get to this display.
Press 4
See \Changing the Value of a Parameter" in Chapter 1 if you need details on
how to edit parameters.
You can change the units by pressing W/dBm .
The notes above about excessive power, and the analog output apply also to the
power of a modulated signal.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNN

OUTPUT POWER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Setting the Frequency of a Modulated Signal

You can also set the frequency of a modulated signal from the display shown
above. Press Freq to select the parameter. See \Changing the Value of a
Parameter" in Chapter 1 if you need details on how to edit parameters.
You can change the units by pressing Hz/kHz while you are editing the value.
5.
The new units come into eect when you press 4
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

ENTER

Setting Wavelength and Power 2-11

The Modulation Output

The Modulation Output on the front panel outputs a version of the modulating
signal that has the same frequency and phase as the modulating signal, but has
a xed, TTL-level amplitude. You can use this to synchronize your external
measuring equipment to the tunable laser source.
To allow for your possible sychronization requirements, there are two ways
in which the signal can be output. Either the signal is combined with the
laser-ready signal, so that the output is kept low when there is no optical
signal being output (for example, while the laser is settling after a change of
wavelength). Or the modulation signal is output all the time. This is set by the
4
5 MODOUT parameter (see \Setting the Modulation Output" in Chapter 3).
Example
Set the frequency of the modulated output to 300Hz.
5.
1. Press 4
2. Press Mod/CW , and Int if necessary, so that the display
looks as shown in Figure 2-9.
3. Press Freq .
4. Type 300 on the numeric keypad.
5. Press Hz/kHz , if necessary, to set the units to Hz, and press
4
5.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

System

OUTPUT POWER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

ENTER

Using External Modulation

The external modulating source can be any signal of up to 5Vpp. A 5Vpp signal
causes 15% modulation of the power of the optical output signal.

Figure 2-10. External Modulation and Output Power

2-12 Setting Wavelength and Power

Setting the Output Power of a Modulated Signal

You can set the output power of a modulated signal if the display looks like this:

Figure 2-11. Setting the Output Power of an Externally Modulated Signal

5, Mod/CW , and Ext as necessary to get to this display.
Press 4
See \Changing the Value of a Parameter" in Chapter 1 if you need details on
how to edit parameters.
You can change the units by pressing W/dBm .
The notes above about excessive power, and the analog output apply also to the
power of a modulated signal.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNN

OUTPUT POWER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

The Modulation Input

The Modulation Input on the front panel is where you input your modulating
signal.

Using Coherence Control

Enabling the coherence control increases the linewidth of the optical output
signal to between 30 and 500MHz (typically). This drastically reduces
interference eects and therefore improves the power stability in sensitive test
setups.

Setting the Output Power of a Coherence Control Signal

You can set the output power of a coherence controlled signal if the display
looks like this:

Setting Wavelength and Power 2-13

Figure 2-12. Setting the Output Power of a Coherence Controlled Signal

5, Mod/CW , and CohCtrl as necessary to get to this
Press 4
display.
See \Changing the Value of a Parameter" in Chapter 1 if you need details on
how to edit parameters.
You can change the units by pressing W/dBm .
The notes above about excessive power, and the analog output apply also to the
power of a coherence controlled signal.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

OUTPUT POWER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

The Coherence Control Uncal Power

At any particular wavelength, coherence control is only available with the

specied linewidth, above a level known as the Coherence Control Uncalibrated
Power, and below the Maximum Power level (that is, in the area between the
two curves in the diagram). The message CC UNCAL indicates that the laser
power is not high enough to provide the specied linewidth. The linewidth is
still broadened.

Figure 2-13.
The Coherence Control Uncalibrated Power and the Maximum Power Level
2-14 Setting Wavelength and Power

3
Other Functions

This chapter describes how to save and recall measurement settings for the
tunable laser source, and how to use the system functions of the instrument.

Storing and Recalling Instrument Settings

5 key gives you access to the instrument settings displays. These

The 4
displays look as follows:
SETTING

Figure 3-1. User Setting Number 1

There are seven settings:

Attenuator When you have the optional attenuator installed, then the

setting also includes the laser output power (Pref), the

attenuation (Att), and the power mode (PowMode, or AttMode).

the Actual Setting, which is the setting being used by the instrument,
the Default Setting, and
ve user settings.
Other Functions 3-1

Note

The Default Setting does not contain -Sweep information. All

other settings contain this information, although it is not shown
on the display.

Figure 3-2. Summary of the Setting Hard- and Softkeys

Use

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Prev

Press

and

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Default

Next

to move between the dierent setting displays.

to reset the Actual Setting to default values.

Press Recall to recall the Default Setting, or the currently displayed user
setting for use as the Actual Setting (overwriting the Actual Setting).
Press Store to store the Actual Setting to the currently displayed user setting
(overwriting the user setting).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Using the System Utilities

Press 4
5 to access conguration information for the tunable laser source.
You get the following screen:
SYSTEM

3-2 Other Functions

3
Figure 3-3. The System Screen

Figure 3-4. Summary of the System Hard- and Softkeys

There are not enough function keys under the display for all the system
functions, therefore they have been divided into two sections. You change from
one section to the other by pressing the More Softkey.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Switching the Instrument into Stand-By

Increasing the Lifetime of the Display

Normally the display is on at all times. If you want to switch o the display
(and the laser), but keep the instrument running (for example, to prevent
Other Functions 3-3

display burn-in, but to keep the heat chamber up to temperature), press

StandBy (you may have to press More to get to this softkey).
While the instrument is in standby mode the laser is switched o, and the word
standby is ashed on the screen. Press any key to reactivate the instrument.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Setting the HP-IB Address

Press HPIB to select the parameter for setting the HPIB address (you may have
to press More to get to this softkey).
See \Changing the Value of a Parameter" in Chapter 1 if you need details on
how to edit parameters.
The default HP-IB address is 24.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Setting the Modulation Output

Press MODOUT to toggle the modulation output (you may have to press More to
get to this softkey). The two possible values are
FRQ&RDY, where the modulation signal is combined with the laser-ready
signal, so that the output is kept low when there is no optical signal being
output (for example, while the laser is settling after a change of wavelength),
and
FRQ, where the modulation signal is output all the time.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Getting Information about the Instrument

Press Info for information on the rmware revision, serial number and the
date of the last calibration of your instrument (you may have to press More to
get to this softkey).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Setting the Date and Time

Press Date to set the date (you may have to press More to get to this softkey).
You can type in the six numbers for the date directly from the numeric keypad,
or you can use the arrow keys and the numeric keypad to edit the date. The
date is changed when you press the 4 5 key.
The date is in the format month/day/year.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Enter

3-4 Other Functions

You cannot use the Modify Knob for editing the date.
Press Time to set the time (you may have to press More to get to this softkey).
You can type in the four numbers for the time directly from the numeric
keypad, or you can use the arrow keys and the numeric keypad to edit the time.
The time is changed when you press the 4 5 key.
The time is in the format hours:minutes.
You cannot use the Modify Knob for editing the time.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Enter

Performing a Selftest
Press SelfTst to start the internal instrument self-test. The instrument
performs a full self-test, indicating after each test, the test that has just been
performed, and the result (passed or failed):
P1 Board
indicates the test of the rst microprocessor board.
P2 Board
indicates the test of the second microprocessor board.
Cal. Data
is the test of the calibration data, which is stored in the
instrument.
HW-Interface tests the hardware interface.
ADC
is the test of the analog to digital converter.
Laser Board tests the laser driver board.
Motor 1
tests the rst of the two motors used to control the tuning of
the laser.
Motor 2
tests the second of the two motors used to control the tuning of
the laser.
tests the motor used to control the attenuation.
Attenuator Motor 3
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

When the test is completed, the message Selftest. . . . . . . passed is shown

on the display. If the instrument fails a selftest, the end of the test is signalled
by three short beeps and the message Selftest . . . . . . . failed is displayed.
Even if the instrument fails the selftest, it will continue to operate as far as
possible.

Other Functions 3-5

Auxiliary Functions

There are four or ve auxiliary functions, accessed by 4 5:

Pmax() , the power characteristic (maximum power as a function of the
wavelength),
! Peak , the setting for maximum output power,
AUX

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

PACT , the Passive Component Test,

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Realign , Automatic Realignment, and

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Secure , the instrument lock (8167B and 8168F only).

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure 3-5. Auxiliary Functions (8168D/E)

Figure 3-6. Auxiliary Functions (8167B and 8168F)

Viewing the Power as a Function of Wavelength

Press Pmax() to get the graph of the maximum power as a function of the
wavelength. This graph is drawn from the calibration data for the instrument.
You can view the graph for the continuous wave power as a function of the
wavelength if you make sure that the CW is selected for the output power. If
coherence control is enabled, you will also be able to see the coherence control
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

3-6 Other Functions

uncal power level. Similarly, to view the maximum power for a modulated
signal, you must make sure that Mod is selected.
There is a cursor on this graph, and the values for the wavelength position of
this cursor, and the maximum power that can be output at this wavelength are
given at the right of the display. If coherence control is enabled, the value for
the minimum power that you should select is also given here.
You can move the cursor with the Modify Knob, or the 4(5, and the 4)5 keys.

Setting the Peak Power

The peak power is the highest power that the instrument can deliver. To set
the output for peak power, press ! Peak . This changes the wavelength to
the lowest wavelength at which the peak power can be achieved, and sets the
power to this peak value.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Passive Component Test (PACT)

See Appendix G.

Automatic Realignment
Press Realign to request automatic realignment. This realigns the laser cavity
after Laser Protection. You should use Automatic Realignment if you have
already tried reactivating the laser and reducing the power, and this has been
unsuccessful.
You should not use Automatic Realignment when the laser is stabilizing.
After pressing Realign , you get the following message:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Laser will be active while realigning.

Please disconnect any device from
output to avoid damage.
Realignment will take approx tt minutes
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

where tt is the approximate time that Realignment will take. This will be
roughly 15 minutes, although actual time taken depends on the wavelength
range of the instrument.
Press the Start softkey. The message Running is ashed in the Display
window. The Display also shows the estimated time before realignment is
NNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Other Functions 3-7

complete. The extreme right softkey oers you the chance to abort, and may be
pressed at any time.

Figure 3-7. Auto Realignment

After realignment, one of the following messages appears in the Display

window:
Abort by user { you have pressed the Abort softkey during realignment. The
laser cavity has not been realigned.
A power down interrupted Auto Realignment at a critical moment {
Automatic Realignment has been interrupted by a power down. The laser cavity
has not been realigned. Continue by pressing the Realign or Exit softkey.
Realignment OK { the laser cavity has been realigned successfully with laser
protection occurring for at most 1 wavelength point over the tuning range.
No improvement { the laser cavity has been realigned, but laser protection has
occurred for more than 1 wavelength point over the tuning range. It is still safe
to continue.
Realignment impossible, contact service { the laser cavity cannot
be realigned because of a serious error. This error is unlikely to be directly
concerned with realignment. Contact service and do not continue.
Not allowed during stabilizing { you tried to Start an operation while
stabilizing when the working temperature is too low. Please wait until it has
stabilized. See \Stabilizing" in Appendix A for more information.
Stabilizing occurred try again later { the instrument has resumed
stabilizing. Realignment is not possible at present.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

3-8 Other Functions

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Secure
Press Secure to lock the instrument. This is to prevent unauthorized persons
from using this Laser Safety Class IIIb instrument (8167B and 8168F only).
When you press Secure , you see the following screen:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure 3-8. \Secure" screen

default pwd: 8167, please change it! or
default pwd: 8168, please change it! . If you see this message, your

You may also see the message

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

password is still 8167 (8167B default) or 8168 (8168F default). To prevent

unauthorized persons using the instrument, you should change the password
(see below).
The \Secure" screen oers you the following facilities:
Lock : lock the instrument,
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

ChngPwd :

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Exit :

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

change the password,

return to the main screen.

Lock the Instrument

When you press

Lock , you see the following screen:

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Other Functions 3-9

3
Figure 3-9. \Secure: Lock Instrument" screen

To lock the screen, you enter the 4-gure password using the DATA keys. The
default password is 8167 (8167B) or 8168 (8168F), but you can change this by
pressing ChngPwd from the \Secure" screen (see below).
When you enter the correct password, you see the following screen:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure 3-10. \Secure" screen - instrument is locked

The laser is switched o as soon as the instrument is locked.

Press Unlock to unlock the instrument. You get the following screen:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure 3-11. \Secure: Unlock Instrument" screen

Enter the correct password to return to the \Secure" screen (Figure 3-8)
3-10 Other Functions

Change the Password

Press

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

ChngPwd

from the \Secure" screen. You see the following screen:

3

Figure 3-12. \Secure: Change Password" screen

Enter the 4-gure password, using the DATA keys. If you have not changed the
password before, the default is 8167 (8167B) or 8168 (8168F). When you enter
the password correctly, you get the following screen:

Figure 3-13.
\Secure: Change Password": Enter new password

Enter a new 4-gure password. You will be asked to verify this number:

Figure 3-14.
\Secure: Change Password": Enter new password again
Other Functions 3-11

When you enter the same number again, the password is changed and you
return to the \Secure" screen (Figure 3-8). This new password is used to lock
the instrument (see above), and you must enter it when you turn on the
machine (see \Starting the 8167B or 8168F" in Chapter 1).
If you forget your password, please contact Hewlett-Packard.
3

3-12 Other Functions

4
Programming the Tunable Laser Source
This chapter gives general information on how to control the tunable laser
source remotely. Descriptions for the actual commands for the tunable laser
source are given in the following chapters. The information in these chapters is
specic to the tunable laser source, and assumes that you are already familiar
with programming the HP-IB.

HP-IB Interface

The interface used by the tunable laser source is the HP-IB (Hewlett-Packard
Interface Bus).
This is the interface used for communication between a controller and an
external device, such as the tunable laser source. The HP-IB conforms to IEEE
standard 488-1978, ANSI standard MC 1.1 and IEC recommendation 625-1.
If you are not familiar with the HP-IB, then refer to the following books:
Hewlett-Packard Company. Tutorial Description of Hewlett-Packard Interface
Bus, 1987.
The International Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. IEEE
Standard 488.1-1987, IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable
Instrumentation. New York, NY, 1987
The International Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. IEEE
Standard 488.2-1987, IEEE Standard Codes, Formats, Protocols and Common
Commands For Use with ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1-1987. New York, NY, 1987

To obtain a copy of either of these last two documents, write to:

The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
345 East 47th Street
New York, NY 10017
USA.

Remote Operation 4-1

In addition, the commands not from the IEEE-488.2 standard, are dened
according to the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments (SCPI).
For an introduction to SCPI, and SCPI programming techniques, refer to the
following documents:
Hewlett-Packard Press (Addison-Wesley Publishing Company, Inc.). A
Beginners Guide to SCPI. Barry Eppler. 1991.
The SCPI Consortium. Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments.
Published periodically by various publishers. To obtain a copy of this manual,
contact your Hewlett-Packard representative.
The tunable laser source interfaces to the HP-IB as dened by the IEEE
Standards 488.1 and 488.2. The table shows the interface functional subset that
the tunable laser source implements.
Table 4-1. HP-IB Capabilities
Mnemonic

Function

SH1
AH1
T6
L4
SR1
RL1
PP0
DC1
DT0
C0

Complete source handshake capability

Complete acceptor handshake capability
Basic talker; serial poll; unaddressed to talk if addressed to listen
Basic listener; unaddressed to listen if addressed to talk; no listen only
Complete service request capability
Complete remote/local capability
No parallel poll capability
Device clear capability
No device trigger capability
No controller capability (Controller capability to be implemented)

4-2 Remote Operation

Setting the HP-IB Address

You can only set the HP-IB address from the front panel. See \Setting the HP-IB
Address" in Chapter 3.
The default HP-IB address is 24.

Returning the Instrument to Local Control

If the instrument has been operated in remote the only key you can use is
Local . This key returns the instrument to local control. Local does not
operate if local lockout has been enabled.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

How the Tunable Laser Source Receives and

Transmits Messages

The tunable laser source exchanges messages using an input and an output
queue. Error messages are kept in a separate error queue.

How the Input Queue Works

The input queue is a FIFO queue (rst-in rst-out). Incoming bytes are stored in
the input queue as follows:
1. Receiving a byte:
a. Clears the output queue.
b. Clears Bit 7 (MSB).
2. No modication is made inside strings or binary blocks. Outside strings and
binary blocks, the following modications are made:
a. Lower-case characters are converted to upper-case.
b. The characters 0016 to 0916 and 0B16 to 1F16 are converted to spaces
(2016 ).
c. Two or more blanks are truncated to one.
Remote Operation 4-3

3. An EOI (End Or Identify) sent with any character is put into the input queue
as the character followed by a line feed (LF, 0A16 ). If EOI is sent with a LF,
only one LF is put into the input queue.
4. The parser starts if the LF character is received or if the input queue is full.

Clearing the Input Queue

Switching the power o, or sending a Device Interface Clear signal, causes

commands that are in the input queue, but have not been executed to be lost.
4

The Output Queue

The output queue contains responses to query messages. The tunable laser
source transmits any data from the output queue when a controller addresses
the instrument as a talker.
Each response message ends with a carriage return (CR, 0D16 ) and a LF (0A16 ),
with EOI=TRUE. If no query is received, or if the query has an error, the
output queue remains empty.
The Message Available bit (MAV, bit 4) is set in the Status Byte register
whenever there is data in the output queue.

The Error Queue

The error queue is 30 errors long. It is a FIFO queue (rst-in rst-out). That is,
the rst error read is the oldest error to have occurred. A new error is only put
into the queue if it is not already in it.
If more than 29 errors are put into the queue, the message '-350 <Queue
Over ow>' is placed as the last message in the queue.

4-4 Remote Operation

Some Notes about Programming and Syntax Diagram

Conventions

A program message is a message containing commands or queries that you send

to the tunable laser source. The following are a few points about program
messages:
You can use either upper-case or lower-case characters.
You can send several commands in a single message. Each command must be
separated from the next one by a semicolon (;).
You end a program message with a line feed (LF) character, or any character
sent with End-Or-Identify (EOI).
You can use any valid number/unit combination.
Example
1500nm, 1.5m and 1.5e-6m are all equivalent.
If you do not specify a unit, then the default unit is assumed. The default
unit for the commands are given with command description in the next
chapter.

Short Form and Long Form

The instrument accepts messages in short or long forms. For example, the
message :STATUS:OPERATION:ENABLE 768 is in long form, the short form of this
message is :STAT:OPER:ENAB 768.
In this manual the messages are written in a combination of upper and lower
case. Upper case characters are used for the short form of the message. For
example, the above command would be written :STATus:OPERation:ENABle.
The rst colon can be left out for the rst command or query in your message.
That is, the example given above could also be sent as STAT:OPER:ENAB 768.

Command and Query Syntax

All characters not between angled brackets must be sent exactly as shown.
The characters between angled brackets (< . . . >) indicate the kind of data that
you should send, or that you get in a response. You do not type the angled
brackets in the actual message. Descriptions of these items follow the syntax
description. The most common of these are:
Remote Operation 4-5

string

is ascii data. A string is contained between a " at the start and the
end, or a ' at the start and the end.
value
is numeric data in integer (12), decimal (34.5) or exponential format
(67.8E-9).
wsp
is a white space.
Other kinds of data are described as required.
The characters between square brackets ([ . . . ]) show optional information that
you can include with the message.
The bar (j) shows an either-or choice of data, for example, ajb means either a or
b, but not both simultaneously.
Extra spaces are ignored; they can be inserted to improve readability.

4-6 Remote Operation

5
Remote Commands
This chapter gives a list of the HP 8167B/8D/8E/8F Remote commands, for use
with the HP-IB.
In the remote command descriptions the parts given in upper-case characters
must be given. The parts in lower-case characters can also be given, but they
are optional.
5

Units

The units and all the allowed mnemonics are given in the table below.
Table 5-1. Units and Allowed Mnemonics
Unit
Default Allowed Mnemonics
deciBel/1mW DBM
DBM, DBMW
Hertz
HZ
HZ, KHZ, MAHZ, GHZ, THZ
meter
M
PM, NM, UM, MM, M
Watt
Watt
PW, NW, UW, MW, W

Where units are specied with a command, only the Default is shown, by the
full range of mnemonics can be used.

Remote Commands 5-1

Command Summary
Table 5-2. Common Command Summary

Command Parameter/Response Min Max

*CLS
*ESE
*ESE?
*ESR?
*IDN?
*OPC
*OPC?
*OPT?
*RCL

*RST
*SAV
*SRE
*SRE?
*STB?
*TST?
*WAI

<value>
<value>
<value>
<string>

0
0
0

<value>
<string>
<location>

<location>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>

1
0
0
0
0

5-2 Remote Commands

Function

Clear Status Command

Standard Event Status Enable Command
Standard Event Status Enable Query
Standard Event Status Register Query
Identication Query
Operation Complete Command
Operation Complete Query
Options Query
5
Recall Instrument Setting
Reset Command
5
Save Instrument Setting
255 Service Request Enable Command
255 Service Request Enable Query
255 Read Status Byte Query
65535 Self Test Query
Wait Command
255
255
255

Table 5-3. Command List

Command

Parameter
Response

:DISPlay
:ENABle
:ENABle?

OFFjONj0j1
0 j1

:LOCK
:LOCK?

OFFjONj0j1, <value>
0 j1

:OUTPut
[:STATe]
[:STATe]?

OFFjONj0j1
0 j1

Unit

Min

Max

Default

Notes

password
0

[:SOURce]

:AM
:INTernal
:FREQuency
:FREQuency?
MINjDEFjMAX
:SOURce
:SOURce?
:STATe
:STATe?

[:SOURce]

:MODout

[:SOURce]

:MODout?

<value>jMINjDEFjMAX HZ
<value>
HZ
<value>
HZ

INTjINT1jINT2jEXTj0j1j2
0j1j2
OFFjONj0j1
0 j1

250

300 000

80 000
0
0

FRQjFRQ&RDYj0j1
0 j1

[:SOURce]

:POWer
:ATTenuation
:ATTenuation?
MINjDEFjMAX
:AUTO
:AUTO?
:DARK
:DARK?
[:LEVel]
[:IMMediate]
[:AMPlitude]

<value>jMINjDEFjMAX [DB]
<value>
DB
<value>
DB
OFFjONj0j1
0 j1
OFFjONj0j1
0 j1

:UNIT
:UNIT?

DBMjDBMWjW
DBMjW

0
0

<value>jMINjDEFjMAX DBM

[:AMPlitude]? <value>
MINjDEFjMAX <value>

40.0dBmy 0.0dBmy 0.0dBm

DBM
W
DBM, W
DBM, W

-10dBmy -4dBmy -7.0dBm

100Wy 398Wy 200W
Attenuator Option
-50dBmy -5.5dBmy -7.0dBm
10nWy
300Wy 200W
DBM

Remote Commands 5-3

Command

Table 5-3. Command List (continued)

Parameter
Response

Unit

Min

Max

Default Notes

[:SOURce]

:WAVElength
[:CWj:FIXED]

<value>jMINjDEFjMAX M

[:CWj:FIXED]? <value>
MINjDEFjMAX <value>
:REFerence?
<value>

:DISPlay
:FREQuency
:FREQuency?

:STATus
:OPERation
[:EVENt]?
:CONDition?
:ENABle
:ENABle?
:NTRansition
:NTRansition?
:PTRansition
:PTRansition?
:QUEStionable
[:EVENt]?
:CONDition?
:ENABle
:ENABle?
:NTRansition
:NTRansition?
:PTRansition
:PTRansition?
:PRESet

<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>

5-4 Remote Commands

M
M

HP 8167B
1255nmy 1365nmy
HP 8168D
1490nmy 1565nmy
HP 8168E
1475nmy 1575nmy
HP 8168F
1450nmy 1590nmy

1310nm
1540nm
1540nm
1540nm

Command

Table 5-3. Command List (continued)

Parameter
Response

:SYSTem
:DATe
:DATe?
:ERRor?
:TIMe
:TIMe?

<value>,<value>,<value>
<value>/<value>/<value>
<value>
<value>,<value>,<value>
<value>:<value>:<value>

:TRACe
:CATalog?
:POINts?

<string>

<trace name> <value>

[:DATa]?
<trace name> <value>,<value>, . . .

WAVEACT

<value>

Unit Min

Max Default

-32768 32767

Notes

Year,Month,Day
Year/Month/Day
Hour,Minute,Second
Hour:Minute:Second
trace names
the number of points
X- and Y-value
for each point
Wavelength in meters

y These are specied minimum and maximum values. Actual values depend on
the calibration of the instrument.

The Common Commands

The IEEE 488.2 standard has a list of reserved commands, called common
commands. These are the commands that start with an asterisk. Some of these
commands must be implemented by any instrument using the standard, others
are optional. The tunable laser source implements all the necessary commands,
and some optional ones. This chapter describes the implemented commands.

Common Status Information

There are four registers for the common status information. Two of these are
status-registers and two are enable-registers. These registers conform to the
IEEE Standard 488.2-1987. You can nd further descriptions of these registers
under \*ESE", \*ESR?", \*SRE", and \*STB?".
The following gure shows how the registers are organized.
Remote Commands 5-5

Figure 5-1. Common Status Registers

The questionable and operation status trees are described in \:STATus

Commands".
Unused bits in any of the registers return 0 when you read
Note
them.

SRQ, The Service Request

A service request (SRQ) occurs when a bit in the Status Byte register goes from
0 ! 1 AND the corresponding bit in the Service Request Enable Mask is set.
The Request Service (RQS) bit is set to 1 at the same time that the SRQ is
caused. This bit can only be reset by reading it by a serial poll. The RQS bit is
5-6 Remote Commands

not aected by the condition that caused the SRQ. The serial poll command
transfers the value of the Status Byte register to a variable.

*CLS

Syntax
Denition

Example

*ESE
Syntax
Denition

*CLS

The *CLS command clears the following:

Error queue
Standard event status register (ESR)
Status byte register (STB)
After the *CLS command the instrument is left waiting for the
next command. The instrument setting is unaltered by the
command, though *OPC/*OPC? actions are canceled.
If the *CLS command occurs directly after a program message
terminator, the output queue and MAV, bit 4, in the status byte
register are cleared, and if condition bits 2-0 of the status byte
register are zero, MSS, bit 6 of the status byte register is also
zero.
OUTPUT 724;"*CLS"

*ESE <wsp><value>

0  value  255
The *ESE command sets bits in the standard event status enable
register (ESE) that enable the corresponding bits in the standard
event status register (ESR).
The register is cleared:
At power-on
By sending a value of zero
The register is not changed by the *RST and *CLS commands.

Remote Commands 5-7

BIT
MNEMONIC
BIT VALUE
7
Power On
128
6
User Request
64
5
Command Error
32
4
Execution Error
16
3 Device Dependent Error
8
2
Query Error
4
1
Request Control
2
0 Operation Complete
1
The Event Status Enable Register
5

*ESE?
Example

The standard event status enable query returns the contents of

the standard event status enable register.
OUTPUT 724;"*ESE 21"
OUTPUT 724;"*ESE?"
ENTER 724; A$

*ESR?

Syntax
Denition

*ESR?

The standard event status register query returns the contents of

the standard event status register. The register is cleared after
being read.
0  contents  255

5-8 Remote Commands

BITS
MNEMONICS
BIT VALUE
7
Power On
128
6
User Request
64
5
Command Error
32
4
Execution Error
16
3 Device Dependent Error
8
2
Query Error
4
1
Request Control
2
0 Operation Control
1
The Standard Event Status Register
Example

OUTPUT 724;"*ESR?"
ENTER 724; A$

*IDN?

Syntax
Denition

*IDN?

The identication query commands the instrument to identify

itself over the interface.
Response: HEWLETT-PACKARD, HP8167B, mmmmmmmmmm, n.n.n

HEWLETT-PACKARD:
HP8167B or HP8168D or HP8168E or HP8168F:
mmmmmmmmmm:
n.n.n:

Example

manufacturer
instrument model number
serial number (not supplied)
rmware revision level

DIM A$ [100]
OUTPUT 724;"*IDN?"
ENTER 724; A$

Remote Commands 5-9

*OPC

Syntax
Denition

*OPC?

Example
5

*OPC

The instrument parses and executes all program message units

in the input queue and sets the operation complete bit in the
standard event status register (ESR). This command can be used
to avoid lling the input queue before the previous commands
have nished executing.
This query causes all the program messages in the input queue
to be parsed and executed. Once it has completed it places an
ASCII '1' in the output queue. There is a short delay between
interpreting the command and putting the '1' in the queue.
OUTPUT 724;"*CLS;*ESE 1;*SRE 32"
OUTPUT 724;"*OPC"
OUTPUT 724;"*CLS;*ESE 1;*SRE 32"
OUTPUT 724;"*OPC?"
ENTER 724;A$

*OPT?
Syntax
Denition

Example

*OPT?

This query returns a string with the options installed in the

tunable laser source.
If the Passive Component Test software is available, the rst
position in the option string is Passive Component Test. If it is
not available, the rst position returns 0.
If the optional attenuator is installed, the third position in the
option string is ATTENUATOR. If it is not installed, the third
position returns 0.
If Coherence Control is available, the fourth position in the
option string is COHERENCE CONTROL. If it is not available, the
fourth position returns 0.
OUTPUT 724;"*OPT?"
ENTER 724;A$

5-10 Remote Commands

*RCL

Syntax
Denition

Example

*RCL <wsp> <location>

0  location  5
An instrument setting from the internal RAM is made the actual
instrument setting.
You can recall user settings from locations 1-5. See \*SAV".
Location 0 contains the default setting, which is the same as
that obtained by *RST.
OUTPUT 724;"*RCL 3"

*RST

Syntax
Denition

*RST

The reset setting (default setting) stored in ROM is made the

actual setting.
Instrument state: the instrument is placed in the idle state
awaiting a command.
The following are not changed:
HP-IB (interface) state
Instrument interface address
Output queue
Service request enable register (SRE)
Standard event status enable register (ESE)
The commands and parameters of the reset state are listed in
the following table.

Remote Commands 5-11

Table 5-4. Reset State (Default Setting)

Parameter
Reset Value
HP 8167B HP 8168D HP 8168E HP8168F
Wavelength
1310nm
1540nm 1540nm 1540nm
df
0GHz
Display Mode
nm
Power
minimum*
Power/Attenuation Mode Power
Unit (Power)
W
Modulation Timing
External
Modulation Status
O
* The minimum value is determined, individually for each instrument at calibration.
Example
5

*SAV
Syntax
Denition
Example

*SRE

Syntax
Denition

OUTPUT 724;"*RST"

*SAV <wsp> <location>

1  location  5
The instrument setting is stored in RAM. You can store settings
in locations 1-5. The scope of the saved setting is identical with
the scope of the standard setting described in \*RST".
OUTPUT 724;"*SAV 3"

*SRE <wsp> <value>

0  value  255
The service request enable command sets bits in the service
request enable register that enable the corresponding status
byte register bits.
The register is cleared:
At power-on
By sending a value of zero.
The register is not changed by the *RST and *CLS commands.

5-12 Remote Commands

BITS
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

MNEMONICS BIT VALUE

Operation Status
128
Request Status
64
Event Status Byte
32
Message Available
16
Questionable Status
8
Not used
0
Not used
0
Not used
0

The Service Request Enable Register

Note
*SRE?
Example

Bit 6 cannot be masked.

The service request enable query returns the contents of the

service request enable register.
OUTPUT 724;"*SRE 48"
OUTPUT 724;"*SRE?"
ENTER 724; A$

*STB?

Syntax
Denition

*STB?

The read status byte query returns the contents of the status
byte register.
0  contents  255

Remote Commands 5-13

BITS
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

MNEMONICS BIT VALUE

Operation Status
128
Request Service
64
Event Status Byte
32
Message Available
16
Questionable Status
8
Not used
0
Not used
0
Not used
0
The Status Byte Register

Example

OUTPUT 724;"*STB?"
ENTER 724; A$

*TST?

Syntax
Denition

*TST?

The self-test query commands the instrument to perform a

self-test and place the results of the test in the output queue.
Returned value: 0  value  65535. This value is the sum of
the results for the individual tests

5-14 Remote Commands

BITS
MNEMONICS
BIT VALUE
15
P1 Board
32768
14
P2 Board
16384
13
Battery Test
8192
6 Motor 3 (Opt. 003)
64
5
Motor 2
32
4
Motor 1
16
3 Laser Control Board
8
2 Analog to Digital Conv.
4
1 Hardware Interface
2
0
Calibration Data
1
5

The Self Test Results

Example

So 16 would mean that Motor 1 had failed, 18 would mean that

Motor 1 had failed, and so had the hardware interface. A value
of zero indicates no errors.
If the self-test fails, the results are also put in the error queue.
It is recommended that you read self-test results from the error
queue. Explanations for the non-zero results of the self-test are
given in Appendix F.
No further commands are allowed while the test is running.
The instrument is returned to the setting that was active at the
time the self-test query was processed.
The self-test does not require operator interaction beyond
sending the *TST? query.
OUTPUT 724;"*TST?"
ENTER 724; A$

Remote Commands 5-15

*WAI

Syntax
Denition

*WAI

Example

OUTPUT 724;"*WAI"

The wait-to-continue command prevents the instrument from

executing any further commands, all pending operations are
completed. There is a delay of approximately 0.1 seconds
between the completion of the nal operation and the parsing
of the next command.

:DISPlay Commands
5

:DISPlay:ENABle
Syntax
Description

:DISPlay:ENABle <wsp> OFFjONj0j1

This command enables or disables the front panel display.

Set the state to OFF or 0 to switch the display o, set the state
to ON or 1 to switch the display on. The default is for the
display to be on.

:DISPlay:ENABle?
Syntax
Description

:DISPlay:ENABle?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":DISP:ENAB ON"

The query returns the current state of the display.

A returned value of 0 indicates that the display is o. A
returned value of 1 indicates that the display is on.
OUTPUT 724;":DISP:ENAB?"
ENTER 724;A$

5-16 Remote Commands

:LOCK Commands
:LOCK
Syntax
Description

:LOCK <wsp> OFFjONj0j1 , <value>

This command switches the lock o and on.

Set the state to OFF or 0 to switch the lock o. Set the state
to ON or 1 to switch the lock on. The laser is switched o
immediately when the instrument is locked.
<value> is the four-gure password.

:LOCK?

Syntax
Description

:LOCK?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":LOCK ON, 8168"

The query returns the current state of the lock.

A returned value of 0 indicates that the lock is o. A returned
value of 1 indicates that the lock is on.
OUTPUT 724;":LOCK?"
ENTER 724;A$

:OUTPut Commands
:OUTPut[:STATe]
Syntax
Description

:OUTPut[:STATe] <wsp> OFFjONj0j1

This command switches the laser current o and on.

Laser light emerges only when the current is on. Set the state
to OFF or 0 to switch the laser current o, set the state to ON
or 1 to switch the laser current on. The default is for the laser
current to be o.
Remote Commands 5-17

:OUTPut[:STATe]?

Syntax
Description
Example

:OUTPut[:STATe]?

The query returns the current state of the laser current.

A returned value of 0 indicates that the laser current is o. A
returned value of 1 indicates that the laser current is on.
OUTPUT 724;":OUTP ON"
OUTPUT 724;":OUTP?"
ENTER 724;A$

[:SOURce] Commands
5

[:SOURce]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency
Syntax

Description

[:SOURce]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency <wsp>
<value>jMINjDEFjMAX
This command sets the frequency of the amplitude modulation
of the laser output.
The frequency can be set in the range 250Hz to 300kHz. You
can set to the minimum, default or maximum programmable
values by sending MIN, DEF, or MAX, respectively, instead of the
value.
The default units are HZ, though KHZ, MAHZ, GHZ, THZ can
alternatively be specied.
The resolution of the frequency is given in the table below:
Range (Hz)
250 . . . 999
1 000 . . . 9 990
10 000 . . . 99 900
100 000 . . . 300 000

5-18 Remote Commands

Resolution (Hz)
1
10
100
1000

[:SOURce]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency?
Syntax
Description

Example

[:SOURce]:AM:INTernal:FREQuency? [MINjDEFjMAX]
This query returns the frequency of the amplitude modulation,
as a oating point number in Hertz. If you specify MIN, DEF, or
MAX with the query, it will return, respectively, the minimum,
default, or maximum modulation frequency.
OUTPUT 724;":AM:INT:FREQ 40.4KHZ"
OUTPUT 724;":AM:STAT ON"
OUTPUT 724;":AM:INT:FREQ?"
ENTER 724;A$

[:SOURce]:AM:SOURce
Syntax
Description

Modulation
Input

[:SOURce]:AM:SOURce <wsp> INTjINT1jINT2jEXTj0j1j2

This command chooses the type or source of the modulation of
the laser output.
Set the source to INT, INT1 or 0 to select internal modulation,
set the source to INT2 or 1 to select coherence control, or
set the source to EXT or 2 to select external modulation. The
default is for internal modulation to be selected.
When external modulation is selected, the signal is modulated
according to the signal applied to the modulation input on the
front panel of the instrument. The maximum signal that can be
applied is 5Vpp , which results in 15% modulation of the optical
output.

[:SOURce]:AM:SOURce?
Syntax
Description

Example

[:SOURce]:AM:SOURce?
The query returns the current state of modulation.
A returned value of 0 indicates that internal modulation is
selected. A returned value of 1 indicates that coherence control
is selected, 2 indicates that external modulation is selected.
OUTPUT 724;":AM:SOUR ON"
OUTPUT 724;":AM:SOUR?"
ENTER 724;A$
Remote Commands 5-19

[:SOURce]:AM:STATe
Syntax
Description

Modulation
Output

[:SOURce]:AM:STATe <wsp> OFFjONj0j1

This command enables and disables amplitude modulation of the
laser output.
Set the state to OFF or 0 to disable modulation, set the state to
ON or 1 to enable modulation. The default is for the modulation
to be disabled.
When the internal modulation is selected, the Modulation
Output on the front panel outputs a version of the modulating
signal that has the same frequency and phase as the modulating
signal, but has a xed, TTL-level amplitude. You can use this to
synchronize your external measuring equipment to the tunable
laser source.
To allow for your possible synchronization requirements,
there are two ways in which the signal can be output. Either
the signal is combined with the laser-ready signal, so that
the output is kept low when there is no optical signal being
output (for example, while the laser is settling after a change
of wavelength). Or the modulation signal is output all the
time. This is set by the :SOURCE:MODOUT command (see
\[:SOURCE]:MODOUT").

[:SOURce]:AM:STATe?
Syntax
Description
Example

[:SOURce]:AM:STATe?
The query returns the current state of modulation.
A returned value of 0 indicates that modulation is disabled. A
returned value of 1 indicates that modulation is enabled.
OUTPUT 724;":AM:STAT ON"
OUTPUT 724;":AM:STAT?"
ENTER 724;A$

5-20 Remote Commands

[:SOURCE]:MODOUT
Note

This command does not conrm to the SCPI standard.

Syntax
Description

[:SOURCE]:MODOUT FRQjFRQRDYj0j1
This command sets the modulation output. The two possible
values are
FRQ or 0, where the modulation signal is output all the time,
and
FRQRDY or 1, where the modulation signal is combined with
the laser-ready signal, so that the output is kept low when
there is no optical signal being output (for example, while the
laser is settling after a change of wavelength).

[:SOURCE]:MODOUT?

Note

This command does not conrm to the SCPI standard.

Syntax
Description

[:SOURCE]:MODOUT?
This queries the mode of the modulation output. The two
possible values are
0, where the modulation signal is output all the time, and
1, where the modulation signal is combined with the
laser-ready signal, so that the output is kept low when there
is no optical signal being output (for example, while the laser
is settling after a change of wavelength).

Remote Commands 5-21

[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation
Attenuator Syntax
Description

[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation <wsp>
<value>jMINjDEFjMAX
This command sets the level of attenuation of
an inbuilt optional attenuator, if this is installed.
The range for the attenuation is specied in
Appendix C. You can set to the minimum,
default or maximum programmable values by
sending MIN, DEF, or MAX, respectively, instead
of the value.
The resolution of the attenuation is specied
to be 0.1dB. The actual resolution of the
attenuator is better than this (typically 0.04dB).
To allow you access to this resolution, you can
specify the attenuation to two decimal places
with the HP-IB command.
You need to be in the Attenuation Mode (see
\[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO")
for this value to have an aect. The
output power is a combination of
this value and the laser output power (see
\[:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPlitude]").
In this respect, this command does not conrm
to the SCPI standard. The SCPI standard
requires that entering an explicit value for the
attenuation switches the attenuation mode OFF.
The default units are DB.

[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation?

Attenuator Syntax

Description

5-22 Remote Commands

[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation? [MINjDEFjMAX]
This query returns the attenuation level of the
optional attenuator if this has been installed.

Example

The value returned is applies

only to the attenuation mode (see
\[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO?").
If you specify MIN, DEF, or MAX with the query,
it will return, respectively, the minimum,
default, or maximum amplitude level.
OUTPUT 724;":POW:ATT:AUTO OFF"
OUTPUT 724;":POW 200UW OUTPUT
724;":POW:ATT 22.32DB"
OUTPUT 724;":POW:ATT?" ENTER 724;A$

[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO
Attenuator Syntax
Description

[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO <wsp>
OFFjONj0j1

This command selects Power or Attenuation

Mode. In Power Mode, you specify the output
power. In Attenuation Mode, you must
specify both the laser output power, and the
attenuation level.
Use ON or 1 to select Power Mode.
Use OFF or 0 to select Attenuation Mode

[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO?

Attenuator Syntax

Description

[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO?
This query returns whether the instrument is in
Power Mode, or Attenuation Mode.
1 indicates Power Mode.
0 indicates Attenuation Mode

Remote Commands 5-23

[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:DARK
Note

This command does not conrm to the SCPI standard.

Attenuator Syntax

Description

[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:DARK OFFjONj0j1
Use ON or 1 to set the attenuator to the \dark"
position. This blocks all light from the laser. You
can use this as an alternative to disabling the
laser, the advantage of doing this is that you
avoid the laser rise time.
This command is available in Attenuation Mode
Only.

[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:DARK?

Note

This command does not conrm to the SCPI standard.

Attenuator Syntax

Description

Example

[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:DARK? 0j1
This query returns whether the attenuator is in
the \dark" position (where all light is blocked
by the laser) or not. If the attenuator is in the
dark position, 1 is returned.
OUTPUT 724;":POW:ATT:DARK ON"
OUTPUT 724;":POW:ATT:DARK?" ENTER 724;A$

5-24 Remote Commands

[:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPlitude]
Syntax

Description

[:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPlitude] <wsp>
<value>jMINjDEFjMAX
This command sets the power of the laser output.
The range for the amplitude is specied in Appendix C. You can
set to the minimum, default or maximum programmable values
by sending MIN, DEF, or MAX, respectively, instead of the value.

Attenuator If you have the optional attenuator installed, the range is

specied in Appendix C under option #003.

If you are using the Attenuation Mode (see
\[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO"), then this
value sets the laser output power, which is not the same as the
output power. The output power is a combination of this value
and the attenuation (see \[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation").
The values for the output power that you set in the Power
Mode, and the laser output power that you set in the
Attenuation Mode, are stored and used independently.

Note

The instrument may not be able to output a signal

with the maximum programmable power, it will
output a signal with the maximum power. Use the
[:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPlitude]? query to
nd out the power being output.
The default units are DBM, or W, depending on the unit selected
by the [:SOURce]:POWer:UNIT command. Independently of the
chosen default unit, you can also specify the unit to be used as
DBM, DBMW, PW, NW, UW, MW or W.

[:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPlitude]?
Syntax

Description

[:SOURce]:POWer[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPlitude]?
[MINjDEFjMAX]
This query returns the amplitude level of the output power. The
value returned is the actual amplitude that is output, which
may be dierent from the value set for the output. If these two
Remote Commands 5-25

gures are not the same, it is indicated in the STATus:OPERation

register.

Attenuator If you have the optional attenuator installed, the value returned

for the power is dependent on whether you are in power or

attenuation mode (see \[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO?").
If you are in power mode, the value returned is the
output power. If you are in attenuation mode, the value
returned is the laser output power, and you must also use
the attenuation value to calculate the output power (see
\[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation?").

Example

If you specify MIN, DEF, or MAX with the query, it will return,
respectively, the minimum, default, or maximum amplitude
level.
OUTPUT 724;":POW:UNIT DBM"
OUTPUT 724;":POW? MAX"
ENTER 724;A$ OUTPUT 724;":POW ",A$

[:SOURce]:POWer:UNIT
Syntax
Description

[:SOURce]:POWer:UNIT <wsp> DBMjDBMWjWatt

This command sets the power units. Set the units to dBm by
sending DBM or DBMW. Set the units to watts by sending W. The
default units are dBm.

[:SOURce]:POWer:UNIT?
Syntax
Description
Example

[:SOURce]:POWer:UNIT?
The query returns the units currently being used. The response
is either 0 for dBm or dBmW, or 2 for Watts.

OUTPUT 724;":POW:UNIT DBM"

OUTPUT 724;":POW:UNIT?"
ENTER 724;A$

5-26 Remote Commands

[:SOURce]:WAVElength[:CW :FIXED]
j

Syntax

Description

[:SOURce]:WAVElength[:CWj:FIXED] <wsp>
<value>jMINjDEFjMAX
This command sets the absolute wavelength of the output. The
default units for the wavelength are meters.
The specied range for the wavelength is given in the table
below.
Table 5-5. Specied Wavelength range
Min
Max Default
HP 8167B
1255nm 1365nm 1310nm
HP 8168D
1490nm 1565nm 1540nm
HP 8168E
1475nm 1575nm 1540nm
HP 8168F
1450nm 1590nm 1540nm

The programmable range is larger than this. The programmable

range is set individually for each instrument when it is
calibrated during production. You can set the wavelength to the
maximum, default or minimum wavelength by sending MIN, DEF,
or MAX, respectively, instead of the value.
The default units are M, though PM, NM, UM, MM can alternatively
be specied.

[:SOURce]:WAVElength[:CW :FIXED]?
j

Syntax
Description

[:SOURce]:WAVElength[:CWj:FIXED]? [MINjDEFjMAX]
The query returns the current wavelength in meters. If
you specify MIN, DEF, or MAX with the query, it will return,
respectively, the minimum, default, or maximum wavelength.
Remote Commands 5-27

Example

OUTPUT 724;":WAVE:REF:STAT OFF"

OUTPUT 724;":WAVE 1542E-9"
OUTPUT 724;":WAVE?"
ENTER 724;A$

[:SOURce]:WAVElength:REFerence?
Syntax
Description
Example

[:SOURce]:WAVElength:REFerence?
The query returns the reference wavelength (0) in meters.
OUTPUT 724;":WAVE:REF?"
ENTER 724;A$

[:SOURce]:WAVElength:REFerence:DISPlay
5

Syntax
Description
Example

[:SOURce]:WAVElength:REFerence:DISPlay
This command sets the reference wavelength to the value of the
output wavelength (!0 ).
OUTPUT 724;":WAVE:REF:DISP"

[:SOURce]:WAVElength:FREQuency

Syntax
Description

[:SOURce]:WAVElength:FREQuency <wsp> <value>

This command sets the frequency dierence used to calculate
a relative wavelength. The output wavelength is made up
of the reference wavelength and this frequency dierence.
The default units for the frequency are Hertz. The output
wavelength () is set from the base wavelength (0 ) and the
frequency oset (df). The formula for calculating the output
wavelength is:
c
=
( )df + c 0
0

where c is the speed of light in a vacuum (2.9982108 ms-1 ).

[:SOURce]:WAVElength:FREQuency?
Syntax

[:SOURce]:WAVElength:FREQuency?

5-28 Remote Commands

Description
Example

The query returns the frequency dierence in Hertz.

OUTPUT 724;":WAVE:FREQ 11E9"
OUTPUT 724;":WAVE:FREQ?"
ENTER 724;A$

:STATus Commands

Each node of the status circuitry has ve registers:

A condition register (CONDition), which contains the current status.This
register is updated continuously. It is not changed by having its contents read.
A positive transition register (PTRansition), which, when enabled, puts a 1
into the event register, when the corresponding bit in the condition register
goes from 0 to 1.
The power-up condition for this register is for all the bits to be disabled.
A negative transition register (NTRansition), which, when enabled, puts a 1
into the event register, when the corresponding bit in the condition register
goes from 1 to 0.
The power-up condition for this register is for all the bits to be disabled.
The event register (EVENt), which contains the output from the transition
registers. The contents of this register are cleared when it is read.
The enable register (ENABle), which enables changes in the event register to
aect the Status Byte.
The status registers for the tunable laser source are organized as shown:

Remote Commands 5-29

5
Figure 5-2. The Status Registers

The OPERation branch of the status registers indicates things that can happen
during normal operation. The QUEStionable branch indicates error conditions.

:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?
Syntax
Description

:STATus:OPERation:CONDition?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":STAT:OPER:COND?"
ENTER 724;A$

This query reads the contents of the OPERation:CONDition

register. Only two bits of the condition register are used:
Bit 8, which is 1 when the output power that you set exceeds
what the laser is capable of producing.
Bit 9, which is 1 while the instrument is performing its
power-up initialization.

5-30 Remote Commands

:STATus:OPERation:ENABle
Syntax
Description

:STATus:OPERation:ENABle <wsp> <value>

This command sets the bits in the ENABle register that

enable the contents of the EVENt register to aect the Status
Byte (STB). Setting a bit in this register to 1 enables the
corresponding bit in the EVENt register to aect bit 7 of the
Status Byte.

:STATus:OPERation:ENABle?
Syntax
Description

:STATus:OPERation:ENABle?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":STAT:OPER:ENAB 768"

This query returns the current contents of the

OPERation:ENABle register.
OUTPUT 724;":STAT:OPER:ENAB?"
ENTER 724;A$

:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?
Syntax
Description

:STATus:OPERation[:EVENt]?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":STAT:OPER:PTR 768"

OUTPUT 724;":STAT:OPER:COND?"
ENTER 724;A$

This query reads the contents of the OPERation:EVENt register.

Only two bits of the event register are used (whether these
bits contain information depends on the transition register
conguration):
Bit 8, which can re ect the excessive state (when the output
power that you set exceeds what the laser is capable of
producing).
Bit 9, which can re ect the initializing state (the instrument is
performing its power-up initialization).

Remote Commands 5-31

:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition
Syntax
Description

:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition <wsp> <value>

This command sets the bits in the NTRansition register. Setting

a bit in this register enables a negative transition (1!0) in the
corresponding bit in the CONDition register to set the bit in the
EVENt register.

:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition?
Syntax
Description

:STATus:OPERation:NTRansition?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":STAT:OPER:NTR 768"

This query returns the current contents of the

OPERation:NTRansition register.
OUTPUT 724;":STAT:OPER:NTR?"
ENTER 724;A$

:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition
Syntax
Description

:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition <wsp> <value>

This command sets the bits in the PTRansition register. Setting

a bit in this register enables a positive transition (0!1) in the
corresponding bit in the CONDition register to set the bit in the
EVENt register.

:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition?
Syntax
Description

:STATus:OPERation:PTRansition?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":STAT:OPER:PTR 768"

This query returns the current contents of the

OPERation:PTRansition register.
OUTPUT 724;":STAT:OPER:PTR?"
ENTER 724;A$

5-32 Remote Commands

:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?
Syntax
Description

:STATus:QUEStionable:CONDition?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":STAT:QUES:COND?"
ENTER 724;A$

This query reads the contents of the QUEStionable:CONDition

register. Only three bits of the condition register are used:
Bit 7, which is 1 when coherence control has been activated
and the chosen power level is too low (that is, below the
Coherence Control Uncalibrated Power for that wavelength).
Bit 9, which is 1 when the temperature in the laser heat
chamber is out of range (stabilizing).
Bit 10, which is 1 when the output has been switched o to
protect the laser diode.
5

:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle
Syntax
Description

:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle <wsp> <value>

This command sets the bits in the ENABle register that

enable the contents of the EVENt register to aect the Status
Byte (STB). Setting a bit in this register to 1 enables the
corresponding bit in the EVENt register to aect bit 3 of the
Status Byte.

:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle?
Syntax
Description

:STATus:QUEStionable:ENABle?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":STAT:QUES:ENAB 1536"

This query returns the current contents of the

QUEStionable:ENABle register.
OUTPUT 724;":STAT:QUES:ENAB?"
ENTER 724;A$

Remote Commands 5-33

:STATus:QUEStionable[:EVENt]?

Syntax
Description

:STATus:QUEStionable [:EVENt]?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":STAT:QUES:PTR 1536"

OUTPUT 724;":STAT:QUES:COND?"
ENTER 724;A$

This query reads the contents of the QUEStionable:EVENt

register. Only three bits of the event register are used (whether
these bits contain information depends on the transition register
conguration):
Bit 7, which is 1 when coherence control has been activated
and the chosen power level is too low (that is, below the
Coherence Control Uncalibrated Power for that wavelength).
Bit 9, which can re ect that the temperature in the laser heat
chamber is out of range (stabilizing).
Bit 10, which can re ect that the output has been switched
o to protect the laser diode.

:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition
Syntax
Description

:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition <wsp> <value>

This command sets the bits in the NTRansition register. Setting

a bit in this register enables a negative transition (1!0) in the
corresponding bit in the CONDition register to set the bit in the
EVENt register.

:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition?
Syntax
Description

:STATus:QUEStionable:NTRansition?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":STAT:QUES:NTR 768"

This query returns the current contents of the

QUEStionable:NTRansition register.
OUTPUT 724;":STAT:QUES:NTR?"
ENTER 724;A$

5-34 Remote Commands

:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition
Syntax
Description

:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition <wsp> <value>

This command sets the bits in the PTRansition register. Setting

a bit in this register enables a positive transition (0!1) in the
corresponding bit in the CONDition register to set the bit in the
EVENt register.

:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition?
Syntax
Description

:STATus:QUEStionable:PTRansition?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":STAT:QUES:PTR 1536"

This query returns the current contents of the

QUEStionable:PTRansition register.
OUTPUT 724;":STAT:QUES:PTR?"
ENTER 724;A$

:STATus:PRESet
Syntax
Description

:STATus:PRESet

Example

OUTPUT 724;":STAT:PRES"

This command presets all the enable registers and transition

lters for both the OPERation and QUEStionable nodes.
All the bits in the ENABle registers are set to 0
All the bits in the PTRansition registers are set to 1
All the bits in the NTRansition registers are set to 0

Remote Commands 5-35

:SYSTem Commands
:SYSTem:DATe
Syntax

Description

:SYSTem:DATe <wsp> <value>,<value>,<value>

where
the rst value is the year (two or four digits),
the second value is the month, and
the third value is the day.
This command sets the date.

:SYSTem:DATe?
5

Syntax
Description

:SYSTem:DATe?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":STAT:DAT 93,3,15"

This query returns the current date in the format YY/MM/DD,

where YY is the year, MM is the month, and DD is the day.

:SYSTem:ERRor?
Syntax
Description

:SYSTem:ERRor?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":SYST:ERR?"
ENTER 724;A$

This query returns the next error from the error queue (see
\The Error Queue" in Chapter 4). Each error has the error code
and a short description of the error, separated by a comma, for
example 0, "No error". Error codes are numbers in the range
-32768 and +32767. Negative error numbers are dened by the
SCPI standard. Positive error numbers are device dependent.
The errors are listed in Appendix F

5-36 Remote Commands

:SYSTem:TIMe
Syntax

Description

:SYSTem:TIMe <wsp> <value>,<value>,<value>

where
the rst value is the hour,
the second value is the minute, and
the third value is the seconds.
This command sets the time.

:SYSTem:TIMe?
Syntax
Description

:SYSTem:TIMe?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":SYST:TIM 16,15,00"

This query returns the current time in the format HH:MM:SS,

where HH is the hour, MM is the minute, and SS is the seconds.
5

:TRACe Commands
:TRACe:CATalog?
Syntax
Description

:TRACe:CATalog?

Note

The trace for the maximum power trace is not available using
:TRACe commands because of the large number of data points.
Use the :POWer? MAX query to get data points for particular
wavelengths.

Example

OUTPUT 724;":TRAC:CAT?"
ENTER 724; A$

This query returns a string with a list of the traces stored in the
instrument. At the moment, this is only CC_UNCAL.

Remote Commands 5-37

:TRACe:POINts? <trace name>

Syntax
Description

:TRACe:POINts?

Example

OUTPUT 724;":TRAC:POIN? CC_UNCAL"

ENTER 724;A$

This query returns the number of data points that are in the
trace. Each data point is described by an x- and a y-value.

:TRACe[:DATa]? <trace name>

Syntax
Description

Example

:TRACe[:DATa]?

This query returns the trace data for the named trace. The
information is returned as a string with the values separated by
commas (,). The values are grouped into data points. Each data
point has an x-value and a y-value. The x-values are given in
meters, the y-values are given in Watts.
OUTPUT 724;":TRAC? CC_UNCAL"
ENTER 724;A$

Other Commands
WAVEACT
Note

WAVEACT cannot be used with the 8168D module

Syntax

WAVEACT <wsp> <value>

Description

where
<value> is the wavelength. If no units are specied, <value>
is taken to be in meters.
This command allows the Tunable Laser Source to adjust the
wavelength at least 61pm of the wavelength meter reading.

5-38 Remote Commands

Note

The accuracy of WAVEACT is dependent on the wavemeter

specication.
It is only as exact as the Wavelength meter.
Set <value> to the actual wavelength measured with a
wavelength meter. Repeat the call to WAVEACT until the new
wavelength is accurate enough, or will not get any better.
When WAVEACT is active, you see the message EXT.  REF. at
the bottom left of the Tunable Laser Source Screen.
You cannot call WAVEACT with a value that would set the
Tunable Laser Source to a wavelength that is not in its
wavelength range.
For example, suppose the current wavelength is at the lower
wavelength limit of, say, 1480.000 nm. Calling WAVEACT with a
dierent value would cause the wavelength to be corrected to
be outside the valid range.
So, after WAVEACT 1480.009, the Tunable Laser Source will
attempt to set a new wavelength of 1479.991 nm, which is
outside the wavelength limits.

Note

Example

It is advisable not to call WAVEACT with modulation or coherence

control on.
For an example of the use of WAVEACT, see \Example 5 Increased Tuning Linearity" in Chapter 6.
WAVEACT 1541nm

Remote Commands 5-39

Passive Component Test software

This section gives the additional HP-IB commands that are implemented in the
Passive Component Test (PACT) software for the tunable laser source. For more
information about the PACT software, see Appendix G.

Note

You should not attempt to use the HP-IB while the tunable laser
source is running a measurement.
Table 5-6. Command Summary
BDATA?
<binary block>
DOSMODE 0j1jOFFjON
DOSMODE?
0 j1

BDATA? nn

Binary Data query.

Response
Description

Example

5-40 Remote Commands

<binary

block>

The BDATA? nn query returns the binary data for the le

on the memory card with the index number nn, where nn
is a number in the range 1 to 80.
The full binary information is 5 220 bytes long. It includes
a a Cyclic Redundancy Check for the data (this is a check
to make sure there are no errors in the data). If the data
is changed in any way, the CRC does not correspond to
the data, and the system can no longer use the data: this
means, that you cannot edit the data.
The format of the binary data is given in \The Result and
Measurement Data Format" in Appendix G.
OUTPUT 724;"BDATA? 1"
REM Input the header
REM Transfer the data
Wsize = 5220/2
FOR I = 1 TO Wsize
ENTER 724 USING "#,W";TRACE(I)
NEXT I

DOSMODE

Dump Device command.

Syntax
DOSMODE 0j1jOFFjON
Description
This command selects the data format for transferring
binary information.
0 or OFF selects non-DOS binary data format, that is
high byte rst.
1 or ON selects DOS binary data format, that is low byte
rst.
DOSMODE?

Response
Description
Example

0j 1

This query returns the selected binary data format.

OUTPUT 724;"DOSMODE 0"

OUTPUT 724;"DOSMODE?"
ENTER 724;A$

Remote Commands 5-41

6
Programming Examples
This chapter gives some programming examples. The language used for the
programming is BASIC 5.1 Language System used on HP 9000 Series 200/300
computers. Example 5 also gives an equivalent listing in C.
These programming examples do not cover the full command set for the
instrument. They are intended only as an introduction to the method of
programming the instrument. The programming examples use the HP-IB.

Programming Examples 6-1

Example 1 - Checking Communication

Function

This program sends a queries, and displays the reply.

Listing
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110

!------------------------------!
! HP 8167B/8D/8E/8F Programming Example 1
!
! A Simple Communications Check
!
!------------------------------!
! Definitions and initializations
!
Tls=724

120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210

DIM String$[50]
!
CLEAR SCREEN
PRINT TABXY(5,10);"Programming Example 1, Simple Communications"
!
! Send an IDN query to the TLS and get the TLS Identification
!
OUTPUT Tls;"*IDN?"
ENTER Tls;String$
PRINT TABXY(10,12);"Identification : ";String$

220
230

!
END

This statement sets the address of the tunable laser source. The rst 7 is to access the HP-IB card in the
controller, the 24 is the HP-IB address of the tunable laser source

The *IDN? query gets the identication of the tunable laser source.

6-2 Programming Examples

Example 2 - Status Registers and Queues

Example 2 - Status Registers and Queues

Function

This program sends a commands and queries typed in by the user. The contents
of the status byte and the standard event status register are displayed. These
registers are updated for each new command, and each time a Service ReQuest
(SRQ) occurs. The number of the most recent error, and the most recent
contents of the output queue is also displayed.

Listing
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190

!-------------------------------------------------!
! HP 8167B/8D/8E/8F Programming Example 2
!
! Status Structure, and a useful self learning tool
!
!-------------------------------------------------!
! Declarations and initializations
!
INTEGER Value,Bit,Quot,Xpos,Ypos
DIM Inp$[100]
DIM A$[300]
Tls=724
ON INTR 7 GOSUB Pmm_srq
!
! Mask the registers
!
OUTPUT Tls;"*SRE 248;*ESE 255"

200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290

!
! Set
!
CLEAR
PRINT
PRINT
PRINT
PRINT
PRINT
PRINT

The *SRE 248 command enables bits 7 (Operation Status Summary), 5 (ESB), 4 (MAV), and 3
(Questionable Status Summary) in the status byte (bit 6 (SRQ) cannot be disabled in this register).
The *ESE 255 command enables all of the bits in the Event Status Register.
up the screen
SCREEN
TABXY(40,3);"Status Byte"
TABXY(4,1);" OPS SRQ ESB MAV QUE"
TABXY(4,2);" +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+"
TABXY(4,3);" :
: :
: : :
: :
:"
TABXY(4,4);" +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+"
TABXY(4,5);"
^"

Programming Examples 6-3

Example 2 - Status Registers and Queues

300
PRINT TABXY(4,6);"
:"
310
PRINT TABXY(4,7);" +-------------------------------+"
320
PRINT TABXY(4,8);" :
OR
:"
330
PRINT TABXY(4,9);" +-------------------------------+"
340
PRINT TABXY(4,10);"
^
^ ^
^ ^
^ ^ ^"
350
PRINT TABXY(4,11);" +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+"
360
PRINT TABXY(4,12);" :
: : :
: :
: :
:"
370
PRINT TABXY(4,13);" +---+---+---+---+---+---+---+---+"
380
PRINT TABXY(4,14);" PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC"
390
PRINT TABXY(40,12);"Standard Event Status Register"
400
PRINT TABXY(4,16);"Last Command :"
410
PRINT TABXY(4,17);"Last Error :"
420
PRINT TABXY(4,18);"Output Queue :"
430
!
440
! Start the program loop and enable the interrupt for the errors
450
!
460
Ende=0
470
GOSUB Pmm_srq
480
ENABLE INTR 7;2
490
!
500
! The Central Loop
510
!
520
REPEAT
530
INPUT "Command ? ",Inp$
540
GOSUB Pmm_srq
550
OUTPUT Tls;Inp$
560
PRINT TABXY(21,16);"
570
PRINT TABXY(21,16);Inp$
580
WAIT 1.0
590
UNTIL Ende=1
600
GOTO 1380
610
!
620
!-------------------------------------------------------------------630 Pmm_srq: ! Interrupt Handling Subroutine to display the status, and the
640
! error and output queues
650
!-------------------------------------------------------------------660
!
670
! Get the value for the Status Byte
680
!
690
Value=SPOLL(Tls)
700
!
710
! Initialize and start the display of the registers
720
!
730
PRINT TABXY(21,17);"
740
PRINT TABXY(21,18);"
750
Ypos=3

6-4 Programming Examples

"

"
"

Example 2 - Status Registers and Queues

760
770
780
790
800
810
820
830
840
850
860
870
880
890
900
910
920
930
940
950
960
970
980
990
1000
1010
1020
1030
1040
1050
1060
1070
1080
1090
1100
1110
1120
1130
1140
1150
1160
1170
1180
1190
1200
1210

FOR Z=0 TO 1
Bit=128
Xpos=7
!
! Do it for each bit
!
REPEAT
Quot=Value DIV Bit
!
! If the bit is set then display 1
!
IF Quot>0 THEN
PRINT TABXY(Xpos,Ypos);"1"
Value=Value-Bit
!
! If MAV is set, then get and display the output queue contents
!
IF Z=0 THEN
IF Bit=16 THEN
ENTER Tls;A$
PRINT TABXY(21,18);A$
END IF
END IF
!
! If the bit is not set, then display 0
!
ELSE
PRINT TABXY(Xpos,Ypos);"0"
END IF
!
! Set up for the next iteration
!
Bit=Bit DIV 2
Xpos=Xpos+4
UNTIL Bit=0
!
! Now that the status byte is displayed, get the Standard Events
! Status Register
!
OUTPUT Tls;"*ESR?"
ENTER Tls;Value
!
! Set up to display the ESR
!
Ypos=12
NEXT Z

Programming Examples 6-5

Example 2 - Status Registers and Queues

1220
1230
1240
1250
1260
1270

!
! Read and display any messages in the error queue
!
REPEAT
OUTPUT Tls;"SYSTEM:ERROR?"
ENTER Tls;Value,A$

1280
1290
1300
1310
1320
1330
1340
1350
1360
1370
1380

IF Value<>0 THEN PRINT TABXY(21,17);Value,A$

UNTIL Value=0
!
! Clear the Status structure and reenable the interrupt before returning
!
OUTPUT Tls;"*CLS"
ENABLE INTR 7
!
RETURN
!
END

The SYSTEM:ERROR? query gets the number of the last error in the error queue.

6-6 Programming Examples

Example 3 - Measuring the Power of a Modulated Signal

Example 3 - Measuring the Power of a Modulated

Signal
Function

This program performs the same sequence as the rst part of the sample session
given in chapter 1. That is, to measure the power of 1540nm signal, modulated
by a 100kHz square wave, at 500Watts.

Requirements

The sample session is written for an HP 8168E/F Tunable Laser Source, and
an HP 8153A Lightwave Multimeter with an HP 81532A Power Sensor (It
is assumed that the power sensor is inserted in channel A). To perform the
sample session as described here, you also need a connector interface for the
multimeter (for example, an HP 81000AI), and a patchcord (if you are using
the HP 81000AI, then a Diamond HMS-10/HP/HRL to Diamond HMS-10/HP
patchcord, HP 81109AC).

Setting Up the Equipment

1. Make sure that all your connectors, and connector interfaces are clean.
2. Make sure that the Optical Output on the laser source is not Active.
3. Connect the output of the laser source to the input of the power sensor (as
shown in the gure below). Make sure that the connector with the orange
strain-relief sleeve is connected to the tunable laser source (the orange sleeve
indicates an angled connector).

Programming Examples 6-7

Example 3 - Measuring the Power of a Modulated Signal

Figure 6-1. Connecting the Instruments for the Sample Session

Typically, you would connect a component to test between the tunable laser
source and the power meter.
4. Make sure that both instruments are powered up.

Note
6
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180

Normally you also need to be sure that the instruments are

properly warmed up before using the source, or making any
measurements. In this case, because the measurements are not
critical, it is acceptable to proceed immediately to the next step.

Listing
!-----------------------------------------!
! Programming Example 3
!
! Measuring the Power of a Modulated Signal
!
!-----------------------------------------!
! Definitions and Initializations
!
Tls=724
Mm=722
!
Wavel=1.540E-6
Oppwr=5.00E-4
Opfrq=1.00E+5
!
! Set the multimeter to measure in Watts, with an averaging time of 1s,

6-8 Programming Examples

Example 3 - Measuring the Power of a Modulated Signal

190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300
310
320
330
340
350
360
370
380
390
400

! and to autorange
!
OUTPUT Mm;"sense1:power:unit W;atime 1s;range:auto on"
!
CLEAR SCREEN
PRINT TABXY(2,2);"Programming example 3: Measuring the power of a Modulated Signal"
!
! Set up the power on the tunable laser source, and on the meter
!
OUTPUT Tls;"wavelength ";Wavel
OUTPUT Mm;"sense1:power:wavelength ";Wavel
!
! Set the modulated power on the TLS
!
OUTPUT Tls;"power:unit W;:power ";Oppwr
OUTPUT Tls;"am:state on;internal:frequency ";Opfrq
!
! Switch on the optical output of the TLS
! Read the value from the multimeter, and display it
!
OUTPUT Tls;"output on"
WAIT 3

410
420
430
440
450

OUTPUT Mm;"read1:power?"
ENTER Mm;A
PRINT TABXY(4,4);"The power read is";A*1E6;"uW"
!
END

Let everything settle before making a reading

Programming Examples 6-9

Example 4 - Measuring a Wavelength Characteristic

Function

This program performs the same sequence as the second part of the sample
session given in chapter 1. That is, to measure a wavelength characteristic.
The requirements and the setting up are as described in Example 3.

Listing

10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300

!-------------------------------------!
! HP 8168E/F Programming Example 4
!
! Measuring a Wavelength Characteristic
!
!-------------------------------------!
! Definitions and Initializations
!
Tls=724
Mm=722
!
Startw=1.535E-6
Stopw=1.545E-6
Stepw=1.E-9
!
! Initialize the two instruments
!
OUTPUT Tls;"power:unit W;:am:state off"
OUTPUT Mm;"sense1:power:unit W;atime 1s;range:auto:on"
!
CLEAR SCREEN
PRINT TABXY(2,2);"Programming Example 4: Measuring a Wavelength Characteristic"
PRINT
PRINT
!
! Find the maximum power for the full range
!
OUTPUT Tls;"power max"

310
320
330
340

OUTPUT Tls;"power? max"

ENTER Tls;Maxpower
Wavel=Startw
REPEAT

We set the power to the absolute maximum for the instrument

6-10 Programming Examples

Example 4 - Measuring a Wavelength Characteristic

350
360
370

OUTPUT Tls;"Wavelength ";Wavel

OUTPUT Tls;"power?"
Enter Tls;Power

380

IF Power<Maxpower THEN Maxpower=Power

This reads back the actual (maximum) power that is being output
We want to nd the lowest maximum power
390
Wavel=Wavel+Stepw
400 UNTIL Wavel>Stopw+(Stepw/2)

We check for the end this way because these are oating point numbers, and they may not fulll an
end condition exactly
410
420
430
440
450
460
470
480
490
500
510
520
530
540
550
560
570
580
590
600
610

OUTPUT Tls;"power ";Maxpower

!
! Switch on the laser source
!
OUTPUT Tls;"output on"
WAIT 2
!
! Measure the power over the range
!
Wavel=Startw
REPEAT
OUTPUT Tls;"Wavelength ";Wavel
OUTPUT Mm;"sense1:power:wavelength ";Wavel
WAIT 1
OUTPUT Mm;"read1:power?"
ENTER Mm;A
PRINT "The power read at";Wavel*1.E+9;"nm is";A*1.E+6;"uW"
Wavel=Wavel+Stepw
UNTIL Wavel>Stopw+(Stepw/2)
!
END

Programming Examples 6-11

Example 5 - Increased Tuning Linearity

Function

This example shows how you can increase the Tuning Linearity, using the HP-IB
command WAVEACT. Figure 6-2 shows the measurement setup.

Figure 6-2. Measurement setup for Increased Tuning Linearity

The tunable laser source and wavelength meter are initialized. The TLS is then
programmed to the rst wavelength of the sweep: for example, 1550.000 nm.
The actual wavelength is read from the wavelength meter, which might be
1550.018 nm. The dierence between the measured and programmed values is
6-12 Programming Examples

Example 5 - Increased Tuning Linearity

18 pm, which is larger than the 1 pm tolerance allowed in this example. The
measured wavelength reading is therefore sent to the TLS using the HP-IB
command WAVEACT.
The TLS will now detune itself to reduce the dierence. The new wavelength
is read with the wavelength meter, and the correction loop repeated until the
dierence is reduced to the allowed tolerance. Once the correct wavelength is
achieved, the receiver can be read.
This process is repeated for each wavelength in the sweep (Figure 6-3).

Figure 6-3.
Flow chart describing Increased Tuning Linearity program.

In this example, the allowed wavelength dierence is 1 pm, that is the minimum
achievable on the TLS. This will typically take several cycles through the
correction loop. Allowing a larger tolerance will reduce the average number of
correction cycles and overall test time.
Programming Examples 6-13

Example 5 - Increased Tuning Linearity

The program also exits the loop after ten tries, regardless of the wavelength
dierence. If the TLS does not reach the desired tolerance within ten tries,
there is a problem in the system. It is most likely that the tolerance has been
set at a smaller value than that of the stability (noise) of the wavelength meter.
This must be avoided, since the tunable laser will be chasing a moving number,
which will waste time without improving performance.
Any wavelength meter of sucient accuracy, linearity, and stability can be
used.

Basic Listing

1
2
3
4
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
110
120
130
140
150
160
170
180
190
200
210
220
230
240
250
260
270
280
290
300

! This program first sets the targeted wavelength

! It then enters in a loop until the Targeted wavelength
! is close enough to the targeted one.
! This program uses the HP 86120A multi-wavelength meter
COM Elevat,Start_wl,Stop_wl,Step_wl,Allow_diff,Numb_tries
COM Target_wl,Current_wl,Diff_wl,Loop_count
!
!
Start_wl=1550
Stop_wl=1555
Step_wl=.001
Allow_diff=.001
Numb_tries=10
!
Target_wl=0
Current_wl=0
Diff_wl=0
!
ASSIGN @Tls TO 724
ASSIGN @Mwm TO 720
!
OUTPUT @Tls;"*CLS"
OUTPUT @Tls;"*RST"
!
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*CLS"
OUTPUT @Mwm;"*RST"
OUTPUT @Mwm;"SENSE:CORR:ELEV 2000"
!
OUTPUT @Tls;"OUTP ON"
!
!
FOR I=Start_wl TO Stop_wl STEP Step_wl
!
PRINT ""

6-14 Programming Examples

Example 5 - Increased Tuning Linearity

310
PRINT "Target = ";I;" NM"
320 !
330
Target_wl=I*1.0E-9
340 !
350
OUTPUT @Tls;":WAVE";Target_wl
360
OUTPUT @Tls;"*OPC?"
370
ENTER @Tls;Ready
380 !
390
Loop_count=0
400 !
410
LOOP
420
OUTPUT @Mwm;":MEAS:SCAL:POW:WAV?
430
ENTER @Mwm;Current_wl
440
Diff_wl=Current_wl-Target_wl
450
PRINT "Current =";Current_wl*1.0E+9,"Diff
=";PROUND(Diff_wl*1.E+9,-4)
460
EXIT IF ABS(Diff_wl)<(Allow_diff+.0005)*1.0E-9 OR
Loop_count=Numb_tries
470
OUTPUT @Tls;":WAVEACT ";Current_wl
480
Loop_count=Loop_count+1
490
END LOOP
500 !
510 ! (Read the receiver at this point)
520 !
530 NEXT I
540 !
550 END

Programming Examples 6-15

Example 5 - Increased Tuning Linearity

Table 6-1. Program Description: Increased Tuning Linearity

Line No.
10 to 20
50 to 90

110 to 130
150 to 160
180 to 220
230
250
280
300 to 310
330
350
360 to 370

390
410
420
430
440
450
460

470
480
490
510
530

Description

Dimension, and make common all variables.

Start, stop and step size are set here for the sweep range. Allow di is the tolerance for wavelength
correction. All wavelength values entered in nm here. Numb tries is the maximum number of times
through the correction loop.
Set working variables to zero.
Tls (HP 8168E/F tunable laser source) is at HP-IB address 24, and the Mwm (HP 86120A multi-wavelength
meter) is at HP-IB address 20.
*CLS (clear status byte) and *RST (reset to default settings) the Tls and Mwm. *RST is important for the
Mwm because it must be in single trigger mode for line 420 to work (single trigger is the default mode).
For accuracy, the elevation must be sent to the Mwm in meters. The default is 0 m, so this line can be
omitted if used at sea level.
Enable the output of the Tls.
Start of the FOR .. NEXT loop for the wavelength sweep. Start, stop and step values set in lines 50 to 70.
End of this loop is line 530.
Optional. Prints a blank line and then the programmed or \target" wavelength.
Convert the target wavelength in nm to meters, which is the default unit on the Tls and Mwm.
Program the Tls with the \target" wavelength.
The Tls must be settled (have nished tuning) before being read by the Mwm. The Tls will not respond to
*OPC? (operation complete) until it is settled.
Reset the correction loop counter.
The start of the wavelength correction loop. The loop ends at line 490.
This triggers a single wavelength measurement on the Mwm.
Enter the measured wavelength in the variable Current wl.
Calculate the wavelength dierence between Current wl (measured by the Mwm) and Target wl (to
which the Tls is set). This is the wavelength error.
Optional. Print the current (measured) wavelength (converted back to nm) and the dierence wavelength
(the error, converted to nm and rounded to four digits).
The correction loop is exited if either the Di wl (wavelength dierence or error) is less than or equal to
that set as Allow di (in line 80), or if this loop has been repeated Numb tries (set in line 90) times. It is
necessary to take the absolute value of Di wl for the comparison. One half pm is added to Allow di,
and < is used as a way to accomplish < or = conditional. This avoids noise problems of less than 1 pm.
This is the special command to send the wavelength measured by the Mwm to the Tls for wavelength.
correction. The Tls internally compares this measured wavelength with the programmed wavelength (of
line 350) and attempts to correct it's output wavelength.
Increments the loop counter by 1.
End of the correction loop.
The Tls is corrected at this point. Put commands to read the receiver (power meter, *OSA , and so on) here.
End of the wavelength sweep loop.

6-16 Programming Examples

Example 5 - Increased Tuning Linearity

C Listing
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------*
*
* File: set_wave.c
*
* Notes:
*
* o You have to include <math.h>, <your_hpib_interface.h> to use
* these functions.
*
* o There is no error handling shown here.
*
* o Instruments are not initialized here.
*
* o Maybe you should wait until your instruments have completed
* their operations. (e.g. Wait for OPC on HP 8167/68)
*
* o In this example we use the hpib library SICL
* (Standard Instrument Control Library);
* used commands:
* - iopen
open an instrument
(like fopen)
* - iclose
close an instrument
(like fclose)
* - iprintf
send a message to an instrument
(like fprintf)
* - iscanf
get a message from an instrument
(like fscanf)
* - ipromptf a combination of iprintf and iscanf
* the type INST is an instrument handle
(like FILE)
*
* o to compile we use the command
*
cc -Aa -o set_wave set_wave.c -lsicl -lm
*
*
*
*-------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
#include
#include
#include
#include

<stdlib.h>
<stdio.h>
<math.h>
<sicl.h>

int
SetExactWvl (double theWvl);
double GetWavelength (INST theInstrument);

/* for our hpib library */

/* function prototypes */

/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
int main (int argc, char **argv)
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
{
double theWvl;

Programming Examples 6-17

Example 5 - Increased Tuning Linearity

if (argc != 2)
exit(-1);
sscanf(argv[1], "%lf", &theWvl);
}

return (SetExactWvl (theWvl));

/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
int SetExactWvl (double theWvl)
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
{
/* open the instruments:
*/
INST laserSource = iopen("hpib,24");
/* laser source at hpib address 24 */
INST waveMeter = iopen("hpib,06");
/* wave meter at hpib address 6
*/
int trialCnt;
int trialMax = 10;
double actWvl;
double diffWvlMax = 1.5e-12;
iprintf (laserSource, "WAVE %lg\n", theWvl);
iprintf (laserSource, "OUTP ON\n");

/* 1.5 pm */
/* set the wavelength */
/* turn the laser on */

for (trialCnt = 0; trialCnt < trialMax; trialCnt++)

{
actWvl = GetWavelength (waveMeter);
/* read the wavelength */

if (fabs(actWvl - theWvl) < diffWvlMax)

break;

iprintf (laserSource, "WAVEACT %lg\n", actWvl);/* tell the laser source */

/* the actual wavelength */

iclose (laserSource);
iclose (waveMeter);
}

/* break if near enough */

/* close the instruments */

return trialCnt;

/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
double GetWavelength (INST theInstrument)
/*-------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
{
double actualWvl;

6-18 Programming Examples

Example 5 - Increased Tuning Linearity

/* With this cryptic command we get the wavelength
/* from an ADVANTEST TQ8325 wavelength meter

*/
*/

ipromptf (theInstrument, "H0D0M0A1E\n","%lf", &actualWvl);

}

return (actualWvl);

Programming Examples 6-19

A
Installation
This appendix provides installation instructions for the tunable laser source.
It also includes information about initial inspection and damage claims,
preparation for use, packaging, storage, and shipment.

Safety Considerations

The Model tunable laser source is a Safety Class 1 instrument (that is, an
instrument with an exposed metal chassis directly connected to earth via the
power supply cable). The symbol used to show a protective earth terminal in
the instrument is .
Before operation, you should review the instrument and manual, including the
red safety page, for safety markings and instructions. You must follow these to
ensure safe operation and to maintain the instrument in safe condition.

Initial Inspection

Inspect the shipping container for damage. If there is damage to the container
or cushioning, you should keep them until you have checked the contents of the
shipment for completeness and veried the instrument both mechanically and
electrically.
The Function Test gives a procedure for checking the operation of the
instrument. If the contents are incomplete, mechanical damage or defect is
apparent, or if an instrument does not pass the operator's checks, notify the
nearest Hewlett-Packard oce.

Installation A-1

Warning

To avoid hazardous electrical shock, do not perform

electrical tests when there are signs of shipping damage to
any portion of the outer enclosure (covers, panels, etc.).

AC Line Power Supply Requirements

The tunable laser source can operate from any single-phase AC power source
that supplies between 100V and 240V at a frequency in the range from 50 to
60Hz. The maximum power consumption is 360VA with all options installed.

Line Power Cable

According to international safety standards, this instrument has a three wire

power cable. When connected to an appropriate AC power receptacle, this cable
earths the instrument cabinet. The type of power cable shipped with each
instrument depends on the country of destination. Refer to Figure A-1 for the
part numbers of the power cables available.

Figure A-1. Line Power Cables - Plug Identication

A-2 Installation

Warning

To avoid the possibility of injury or death, you must

observe the following precautions before switching on the
instrument.
If this instrument is to be energized via an
autotransformer for voltage reduction, ensure that the
Common terminal connects to the earthed pole of the
power source.
Insert the power cable plug only into a socket outlet
provided with a protective earth contact. Do not negate
this protective action by the using an extension cord
without a protective conductor.
Before switching on the instrument, the protective
earth terminal of the instrument must be connected to a
protective conductor. You can do this by using the power
cord supplied with the instrument.
Do not interrupt the protective earth connection.

The following work should be carried out by a qualied electrician. All local
electrical codes must be strictly observed. If the plug on the cable does not t
the power outlet, or if the cable is to be attached to a terminal block, cut the
cable at the plug end and rewire it.
The color coding used in the cable depends on the cable supplied. If you are
connecting a new plug, it should meet the local safety requirements and include
the following features:
Adequate load-carrying capacity (see table of specications).
Ground connection.
Cable clamp.
The AC power requirements are summarized on the rear panel of the
instrument.

Installation A-3

Figure A-2. Rear Panel Markings

Changing the Battery

This instrument contains a lithium battery. Changing the battery should be
carried out only by a qualied electrician or by HP service personnel. There is a
danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the
same or an equivalent type (HP part number 1420-0298). Discard used batteries
according to local regulations.

Changing the Fuse

A

There are two fuses in this instrument. Both of the fuses are T4.0A/250V
time-lag (HP Part No. 2110-0014). The fuse holder is at the rear of the
instrument, below the line power connector. To change a fuse,
1. Release the fuse holder: use the blade of a at-headed screwdriver to
depress the catch at the top of the holder and then pull the holder out a
little.

A-4 Installation

Figure A-3. Releasing the Fuse Holder

2. Pull the fuse holder out of the instrument.

Figure A-4. The Fuse Holder

3. Check and change the fuses as necessary.

4. Place the fuse holder back in the instrument, and push it until the catch
clicks back into place.

Installation A-5

Operating and Storage Environment

The following summarizes the tunable laser source operating environment

ranges. In order for the tunable laser source to meet specications, the
operating environment must be within these limits.

Warning

The tunable laser source is not designed for outdoor use. To

prevent potential re or shock hazard, do not expose the
instrument to rain or other excessive moisture.

Temperature

The instrument should be protected from temperature extremes and changes in

temperature that may cause condensation within it.
The storage and operating temperature for the tunable laser source are given in
the table below.
Table A-1. Temperature
Operating Range Storage Range
Specied 10 C to 35 C
-40 C to 70 C

Humidity
A

The operating humidity for the tunable laser source is 15% to 95% from 10 C to
35 C.

Instrument Positioning and Cooling

The tunable laser source has a cooling fan mounted internally. Mount or
position the instrument upright and horizontally so that air can circulate
through it freely. When operating the tunable laser source, choose a location
that provides at least 75mm (3inches) of clearance at the rear, and at least
25mm (1inch) of clearance at each side. Failure to provide adequate air
clearance may result in excessive internal temperature, reducing instrument
reliability.

A-6 Installation

Figure A-5. Correct Positioning of the Tunable Laser Source

Switching on the Tunable Laser Source

When you switch on the tunable laser source it goes through three start-up
phases
1. Self test,
2. Initializing, and
3. Stabilizing.

Self test

This is the same self test as described in \Performing a Selftest" in Chapter 3.

Initializing

Initializing takes a minute or two. During this time, the instrument performs
a self test. The rst test is of the memory; while this is being done, all the
elements on the display are turned on. If the instrument fails the memory test,
this display will start blinking. After this, the rest of the self test is performed.
The test being performed is shown on the display.

Installation A-7

Stabilizing

Stabilizing is the process of heating up the heat chamber to its operating

temperature (5561 C). The length of time taken depends on how warm the heat
chamber is when the instrument is rst switched on. Under normal (laboratory)
conditions, this takes approximately one hour. The percentage of operating
temperature that has been reached is displayed as part of the STABILIZING
message that is shown at the top of the screen during the process. The
instrument only meets specications while the heat chamber is at the operating
temperature.
If you try to set a power level which cannot be supplied during the stabilizing,
then the AVAILABLE message is displayed with the maximum power that is
available.
If the value is simultaneously too low for the coherence control,
Note
if you are also using this, the AVAILABLE is shortened to AVA.

Stabilizing during Operation

The instrument will maintain the heat chamber within the operating
limits (54 C!56 C) if you are using the instrument in a normal laboratory
environment. If you are using the tunable laser source in either an extremely
warm, or an extremely cold environment, the STABILIZING message may
appear from time to time as the instrument tries to get back to the operating
temperature. The stabilizing level should not decrease beyond 95%.
In an extreme case, the STABILIZING message will appear and the percentage
value will decrease below 95%, and possibly keep decreasing. In this case
you should switch o the instrument, and let it cool down completely before
powering it up again.

A-8 Installation

Signal Outputs.

There are two signal outputs on the front panel of the tunable laser source.
One of these is the Modulation Output, which outputs the internal signal used
to modulate the optical output. This is a squarewave signal with 50% duty
cycle, and is at TTL levels (see \Setting the Modulation Output" in Chapter 3
and \[:SOURCE]:MODOUT" in Chapter 5 for more information).
The other is the analog output, which outputs a voltage level proportional to
the power of the output laser signal. The relationship between this voltage
level and the output power is not calibrated, but is approximately 1mV for
each 1W.

Caution

The maximum external voltages that can be applied to the

outputs of this instrument are 610V.

Optical Output
Caution

If the optical termination on your instrument is angled, you can

only use cables with angled connectors with the instrument.

See \Connector Interfaces and Other Accessories" in Appendix B for further

details on connector interfaces and accessories.
Option 007 If you have an instrument with a polarization maintaining ber
(PMF), the PMF will be automatically aligned and maintain the
state of polarization..
The ber is of Panda type, with TE mode in the slow axis in line
with the connector key.

Installation A-9

Figure A-6. PMF Output

HP-IB Interface

You can connect your HP-IB interface into a star network, a linear network, or a
combination star and linear network. The limitations imposed on this network
are as follows:
The total cable length cannot exceed 20 meters
The maximum cable length per device is 2 meters
No more than 15 devices may be interconnected on one bus.

Connector

The following gure shows the connector and pin assignments.

Connector Part Number: 1251-0293

A-10 Installation

Caution

Caution

Figure A-7. HP-IB Connector

HP products delivered now are equipped with connectors
having ISO metric- threaded lock screws and stud mounts (ISO
M3.520.6) that are black in color. Earlier connectors may have
lock screws and stud mounts with imperial-threaded lock screws
and stud mounts (6-32 UNC) that have a shiny nickel nish.

It is recommended that you do not stack more than three

connectors, one on top of the other.
Hand-tighten the connector lock screws. Do not use a
screwdriver.

HP-IB Logic Levels

The tunable laser source HP-IB lines use standard TTL logic, as follows:
True = Low = digital ground or 0Vdc to 0.4Vdc
False = High = open or 2.5Vdc to 5Vdc
All HP-IB lines have LOW assertion states. High states are held at 3.0Vdc by
pull-ups within the instrument. When a line functions as an input, it requires
approximately 3.2mA to pull it low through a closure to digital ground. When
a line functions as an output, it will sink up to 48mA in the low state and
approximately 0.6mA in the high state.

Installation A-11

Note

The HP-IB line screens are not isolated from ground.

Claims and Repackaging

If physical damage is evident or if the instrument does not meet specication
when received, notify the carrier and the nearest Hewlett-Packard Service
Oce. The Sales/Service Oce will arrange for repair or replacement of the
unit without waiting for settlement of the claim against the carrier.

Return Shipments to HP

If the instrument is to be shipped to a Hewlett-Packard Sales/Service Oce,

attach a tag showing owner, return address, model number and full serial
number and the type of service required.
The original shipping carton and packing material may be reusable, but
the Hewlett-Packard Sales/Service Oce will provide information and
recommendation on materials to be used if the original packing is no longer
available or reusable. General instructions for repackaging are as follows:
1. Wrap instrument in heavy paper or plastic.
2. Use strong shipping container. A double wall carton made of 350-pound test
material is adequate.
3. Use enough shock absorbing material (3 to 4 inch layer) around all sides
of the instrument to provide a rm cushion and prevent movement inside
container. Protect control panel with cardboard.
4. Seal shipping container securely.
5. Mark shipping container FRAGILE to encourage careful handling.
6. In any correspondence, refer to instrument by model number and serial
number.

A-12 Installation

B
Accessories
Mainframe
Mainframe
Description
Tunable Laser Source 1255nm to 1365nm
Tunable Laser Source 1490nm to 1565nm
Tunable Laser Source 1470nm to 1580nm
Tunable Laser Source 1450nm to 1590nm
Handle Kit
Rack Kit
(Additional) Operating and
Programming Manual

Model No.
HP 8167B
HP 8168D
HP 8168E
HP 8168F
Option 1CN
Option 1CM
Option 0B2

Accessories B-1

Options

Figure B-1. Tunable Laser Source Options Overview

Option 003:

Built-in optical attenuator with 40dB attenuation range, cannot be combined

with option 007.
Option 003 is not available for the 8168D.

Option 007:

Polarization maintaining ber, Panda-type, for straight or angled connector types

(depending on the connector option selected), cannot be combined with option
003 or 023.
Option 007 is available for all models.

Connector Interfaces and Other Accessories

B

The tunable laser source is supplied with one of three connector interface
options.
Option 021 with a straight contact connector
Option 022 with an angled contact connector
Option 023 with a Diamond HMS-10/HP/HRL angled, non-contact connector.
Cannot be combined with option 007.
Option 023 is not available for the 8168D.
B-2 Accessories

Option 021, Straight Contact Connector. If you want to use straight

connectors (such as FC/PC, Diamond HMS-10, DIN, Biconic, SC, ST, or D4) to
connect to the instrument, you must
1. attach your connector interface (see the list of connector interfaces below) to
the interface adapter,
2. then connect your cable.

B
Figure B-2. Tunable Laser Source Option 021 Conguration

Accessories B-3

Connector Interface
Description
Model No.
Biconic
HP 81000WI
D4
HP 81000GI
Diamond HMS-10 HP 81000AI
DIN 47256
HP 81000SI
FC/PC
HP 81000FI
SC
HP 81000KI
ST
HP 81000VI
E-2000
HP 81000HI
Option 022, Angled Contact Connector. If you want to use angled contact
connectors (such as FC/APC, Diamond HRL-10, DIN, or SC/APC) to connect to
the instrument, you must
1. attach your connector interface (see the list of connector interfaces below) to
the interface adapter,
2. then connect your cable.

B-4 Accessories

Figure B-3. Tunable Laser Source Option 022 Conguration

Connector Interface
Description
Model No.
DIN 47256/4108.6 HP 81000SI
FC/APC
HP 81000NI
SC/APC
HP 81000KI
E-2108.6
HP 81000HI

Accessories B-5

Option 023, Diamond HMS-10/HRL Angled, Non-Contact Connector. The

instrument as it is delivered with this option can only be used with cables with
Diamond HMS-10/HP/HRL angled connectors. To connect angled connectors
(such as FC/APC, DIN 47256-4108, Radiall, and so on), use the appropriate
patchcord.
If you want to use straight connectors (such as FC/PC, Diamond HMS-10, DIN,
Biconic, SC, ST, or D4) to connect to the instrument, you must
1. replace the HMS-10 connector interface with an interface adapter (HP
81000UI),
2. attach your connector interface (see the list of connector interfaces below) to
the interface adapter,
3. then connect your cable.

Figure B-4. Tunable Laser Source Option 023 Conguration

B

B-6 Accessories

Cables with Angled Connectors

Description
Diamond HMS-10/HP/HRL - Bare Fiber
Diamond HMS-10/HP/HRL - Diamond HMS-10/HP/HRL
Diamond HMS-10/HP/HRL - Diamond HMS-10/HP
Diamond HMS-10/HP/HRL - DIN 47256-4108
Diamond HMS-10/HP/HRL - FC/APC
Diamond HMS-10/HP/HRL - Radiall

Model No.
HP 81102BC
HP 81102AC
HP 81109AC
HP 81102SC
HP 81102PC
HP 81102DC

Interface Adapter
Description
Model No.
Interface Adapter HP 81000UI

HP-IB Cables and Adapters

The HP-IB connector is compatible with the connectors on the following cables
and adapters.
HP-IB Cable, 10833A, 1 m (3.3 ft.)
HP-IB Cable, 10833B, 2 m (6.6 ft.)
HP-IB Cable, 10833C, 4 m (13.2 ft.)
HP-IB Cable, 10833D, 0.5 m (1.6 ft.)
HP-IB Adapter, 10834A, 2.3 cm extender.
B

Accessories B-7

C
Specications
Denition of Terms
Absolute wavelength
accuracy:

The maximum dierence between the actual wavelength and the

displayed wavelength of the TLS. Wavelength is dened as
wavelength in vacuum.
Conditions: constant power level, temperature within operating
temperature range, coherence control o.
Measurement with wavelength meter.

Linewidth:

The 3 dB width of the optical spectrum, expressed in Hertz.

Conditions: temperature within operating temperature range,
coherence control o.
Measurement with heterodyning technique: the output of the laser
under test is mixed with another laser of the same type on a wide
bandwidth photodetector. The electrical noise spectrum of the
photodetector current is measured with HP lightwave signal analyzer.

Maximum specied output The maximum output power specied at a specic wavelength.
power:
Measurement at the end of a patchcord.

Figure C-1.
Maximum Specied Output Power for 8168D, E and F
(without options)

Minimum output power:

The minimum output power for which the specications apply.

Specications C-1

Output power:

The maximum output power for the specied TLS tuning range.
Conditions: temperature within operating temperature range.
Measurement with power meter at the end of a single-mode ber
patchcord.

Peak power:

The highest optical power within specied wavelength range.

Polarization extinction
ratio:

The ratio of optical power in the slow axis of the

polarization-maintaining ber to optical power in the fast axis within
a specied wavelength range.
Conditions: only for TLS with polarization maintaining ber, TE
mode in slow axis and oriented in line with connector key.
Measurement with rotatable polarizer at the end of a
polarization-maintaining patchcord, with polarizer orientations for
the fast and slow axes kept xed while changing the wavelength.

Power atness:

When changing the wavelength and measuring the dierences

between actual and displayed power levels, the power atness is 6
half the span between the maximum and the minimum value of all
dierences relative to the mean power.
Conditions: uninterrupted line voltage, constant power setting,
temperature within 61 K.
Measurement with optical power meter.

Power linearity:

When changing the power level and measuring the dierences

between actual and displayed power levels, the power linearity is 6
half the span between the maximum and the minimum value of all
dierences.
Conditions: uninterrupted TLS line voltage, constant wavelengthand power level settings, temperature within 61 K.
Measurement with optical power meter.

Power repeatability:

The random uncertainty in reproducing the power level after

changing and re-setting the power level or wavelength. The power
repeatability is 6 half the span between the maximum and the
minimum value of all dierences relative to the mean power.
Conditions: uninterrupted TLS line voltage, constant wavelength,
temperature within 61 K.
Measurement with optical power meter.

Power stability:

The change of the power level during a given time span, expressed
as 6 half the span of power changes relative to the mean power.
Conditions: uninterrupted TLS line voltage, constant wavelengthand power level settings, temperature within 61 K, time span as
specied.
Measurement with optical power meter.

C
C-2 Specications

Relative intensity noise

(RIN):

The square of the RMS optical power amplitude divided by the

measurement bandwidth and the square of the average optical
power, expressed in dB/Hz.
Conditions: coherence control o, temperature within operating
temperature range, frequency range 0.1 to 6 GHz.
Measurement with HP lightwave signal analyzer.

Relative wavelength
accuracy:

When randomly changing the wavelength and measuring the

dierences between the actual and displayed wavelengths, the
relative wavelength accuracy is 6 half the span between the
maximum and the minimum value of all dierences.
Conditions: uninterrupted TLS line voltage, constant power level,
temperature within operating temperature range, coherence control
o.
Measurement with wavelength meter.

Sidemode suppression
ratio:

The ratio of average signal power to the optical power of the highest
sidemode within a distance from 0.1 to 6 GHz to the signal's optical
frequency, expressed in dB.
Conditions: at a specied output power and wavelength range,
temperature within operating temperature range, coherence control
o.
Measurement with HP lightwave signal analyzer using heterodyning
method.

Source spontaneous
emission:

The ratio of spontaneous emission power in 0.1 nm bandwidth to

signal power within a 62 nm window around the signal wavelength,
at ! maximum specied output power, expressed in dB per 0.1 nm.
Conditions: at maximum specied output power, temperature within
operating temperature range, coherence control o.
Measurement with optical spectrum analyzer at 0.1 nm resolution
bandwidth.

Wavelength range:

The range of wavelengths for which the specications apply.

Wavelength repeatability: The uncertainty in reproducing the wavelength after detuning and
re-setting the wavelength. The wavelength repeatability is 6 half the
span between the maximum and the minimum value of all changes.
Conditions: uninterrupted TLS line voltage, constant power level,
temperature within operating temperature range, coherence control
o.
Measurement with wavelength meter.
Wavelength resolution:

The smallest possible displayed wavelength increment / decrement.

Wavelength stability:

The change of wavelength during a given time span, expressed as 6

half the span between the maximum and the minimum wavelengths.
Conditions: uninterrupted TLS line voltage, constant wavelengthand power level settings, coherence control o, temperature within
61 K, time span as specied.
Measurement with wavelength meter
Specications C-3

Performance Specications

Specications describe the instrument's warranted performance. They are

measured at the end of a 2m long patchcord and are valid for the output power
and the wavelength ranges stated below.
Supplementary performance characteristics describe the instrument's
non-warranted typical performance.

C
C-4 Specications

Wavelength Range
Absolute Wavelength Accuracy,
typ1
Relative Wavelength Accuracy

Wavelength Resolution
Wavelength Stability

(typ over 1 hour at constant

temperature)

Wavelength Repeatability

Sidemode Suppression Ratio, typ3

Source Spontaneous Emission4

Relative Intensity Noise (RIN),

typ
Linewidth (typ),
coherence control o
Eective Linewidth (typ),
coherence control on5

HP 8167B

HP 8168D

HP 8168E

HP 8168F

60.035nm

60.1nm

60.035nm,
typ 60.001nm2

60.035nm

1255nm to 1365nm 1490nm to 1565nm 1475nm to 1575nm 1450nm to 1590nm

60.1nm
60.2nm
60.1nm
(1310-1350nm)
60.050nm
(1255-1365nm)
typ 60.001nm2
0.001nm,
170MHz at 1300nm
<6100MHz

60.035nm
(1310-1350nm)
60.050nm
(1255-1365nm)
typ 60.001nm2
>40dB
(1260-1360nm at
-3dBm)
<-45dB/0.1nm
(1310-1350nm)
<-40dB/0.1nm
(1260-1360nm)
<-35dB/0.1nm
(1255-1365nm)

(1475-1575nm)
60.050nm
(1450-1590nm),
typ 60.001nm2
0.001nm, 125MHz at 1550nm

0.1nm

61GHz

<6100MHz

60.1nm

60.035nm,
typ 60.001nm2

n/a

>40dB
(1500-1570nm at
0dBm)
<-45dB/0.1nm
(1500-1570nm)
<-35dB/0.1nm
(1475-1575nm)

<-40dB/0.1nm
(1500-1565nm)
<-35dB/0.1nm
(1490-1565nm)

<-145dB/Hz

60.035nm
(1475-1575nm)
60.050nm
(1450-1590nm),
typ 60.001nm2
>50dB
(1475-1575nm at
1dBm)
<-55dB/0.1nm
(1520-1570nm)
<-45dB/0.1nm
(1475-1575nm)
<-35dB/0.1nm
(1450-1590nm)

100kHz

10-500MHz
30-500MHz
50 to 500MHz
50 to 500 MHz
(1260-1360nm)
(1500-1565nm)
(1500-1570nm)
(1475-1575nm)
1 Measured with a wavelength meter in a vacuum.
2 Performance when controlled with appropriate wavelength meter.
3 Measured by heterodyning method. Reduce output power if options are attached.
4 Measured with optical spectrum analyzer at 0.1nm resolution bandwidth at maximum specied output power.
5 At power levels larger than CC uncal value.

C
Specications C-5

Tuning Speed (typ for a

1/10/100nm step)6 7
with #0038

Output Power 9

for #0238
for #0038
for #0078
for #023 and #0038

Minimum Output Power

with #0038

Power Linearity
with #0038

Power Stability (over 1 hour)

Power Repeatability (typ)
Power Flatness
versus Wavelength
with #0038

HP 8167B

HP 8168D

HP 8168E

250ms/300ms/2s

n/a

(1310-1350nm)
>-3dBm
(1260-1360nm)
>-7dBm
(1255-1365nm)
reduce by 1dB
reduce by 1.5dB
reduce by 1dB
reduce by 2.5dB
-7dBm
-47dBm

(1500-1565nm)
>-10dBm
(1490-1565nm)

200ms/300ms/2s

HP 8168F

250ms/300ms/2s

>+4dBm peak typ >-3dBm peak typ >+1dBm peak typ >+8dBm peak typ
>+3dBm
>-4dBm
>0dBm
>+7dBm

60.3dB11
60.03dB12
(typ 60.01dB)
60.04dB11
60.1dB

60.2dB12

(1500-1570nm)
>-10dBm
(1475-1575nm)

(1520-1570nm)
>1dBm
(1475-1575nm)
>-7dBm
(1450-1590nm)
n/a
reduce by 1dB
n/a
reduce by 1.5dB
reduce by 1dB
reduce by 1dB
n/a
reduce by 2.5dB
-10dBm
-7dBm
n/a
-50dBm
-47dBm
60.1dB
60.1dB10
n/a
60.3dB
60.3dB10
60.03dB (typ 60.01dB)

60.04dB

60.2dB
typ 60.1dB

60.1dB

n/a

60.2dB

6 Applicable for CW operation.

7 The Tuning Speed increases when Modulation is on.
8 Listed options are described in the Supplementary Performance Characteristics
9 The Maximum power is lower when Modulation is on.
10 For power settings below -3dBm (with option 003:P
REF -3dBm, independent

60.04dB10
60.1dB10

(1475-1575nm)
60.2dB10
(1450-1590nm)
60.2dB10
(1475-1575nm)
60.3dB10
(1450-1590nm)

<
of attenuator setting, or power
setting below -43dBm), the values shown may increase by up to 5 times.
11 with option #003: at constant Relative Humidity (65%)
12 with option #003: at 1355.0 nm and 1359.5 nm, power may vary by up to 60.25 typically, depending on ambient
relative humidity and related water absorption.

C
C-6 Specications

Supplementary Performance Characteristics

Characteristics

Output isolation (typ): 50dB

Return loss (typ): 60dB (except option 021).

Operating Modes
Internal Modulation

Modulation frequency: 250Hz to 300kHz (squarewave)

Duty cycle: 50% xed
Modulation depth: 100% (on/o)
Modulation output: TTL reference signal. Max power reduced by 1dB.

External modulation

Modulation frequency: 200kHz to 20MHz (at 3dB optical bandwidth, typ)

Modulation depth (max, typ): 615%

Coherence Control

Eective linewidth of 50 to 500Mhz typ (30-500MHz typ for HP 8167B and HP

8168D).
For measurements on components with 2m long patchcords and connectors with
14dB return loss, the eective linewidth results in a typical power stability of
<60.025dB (<60.1dB for HP 8167B and HP 8168D) over 1 minute by drastically
reducing interference eects in the test setup.

General
Polarization maintaining ber

Fiber type: Panda

Orientation TE mode in slow axis, in line with connector key.
Polarization Extinction Ratio:

C
Specications C-7

>15dB for HP8167B between 1310 and 1350nm, (>12dB over the full

wavelength range).
>15dB for HP8168D over the full wavelength range;
>15dB for HP8168E/F between 1490 and 1575nm, (>12dB over the full
wavelength range).

HP-IB Interface

HP-IB Interface function code: SH1, AH1, T6, L4, SR1, RL1, PP0, DC2, DT0,
C0

Passive Component Test Software

Files and data can be stored on memory cards according to PCMCIA type 1,
standard PCMCIA 1.0/JEIDA 4.0. Type 1 cards are 3.3mm thick. Recommended
card capacity 512kByte.

Laser Class

HP8168D/E: Class 1 according to FDA 21 CFR 1040.10, Class 3A according to

IEC 825-1 (1993).
HP 8167B and HP 8168F: Class IIIb according to FDA 21 CFR 1040.10, Class
3A according to IEC 825-1 (1993).
Analog output: provides output voltage proportional to optical output power
(except #003).
Recalibration period: 2 years.
Warm-up time: typically <1 hour, can be used with reduced power in this
phase.

Environmental

Altitude: up to 4,600m (15,000 feet).

Storage temperature: -40 C to +70 C
Operating temperature: 10 C to 35 C
Humidity: <95%R.H. (10 C to 35 C)
Installation Category (IEC 664): II
Pollution Degree (IEC 664): 2

C-8 Specications

Specications are valid at non-condensing conditions.

Power: 100 to 240Vrms , 610%. 260VA maximum.
Dimensions: 145mm H, 426mm W, 545mm D (5.8"216.9"221.6")
Weight: net 18kg (40lbs), shipping 21kg (46lbs).

Listed options
Option 003:
Option 007:
Option 021:
Option 023:

built-in attenuator
polarization maintaining Panda ber
straight contact output connector
angled non-contact output connector

Other Specications

Acoustic Noise Emission:
For ambient temperature up to 30 C
Lp = 40.2dB(A)
Lw = 4.8 Bel
Typical operator position,
normal operation.
Data are results from type tests per ISO 7779
(EN 27779).


Gerauschemissionswerte:
Bei einer Umgebungstemperatur bis 30 C
Lp = 40.2dB(A)
Lw = 4.8 Bel
am Arbeitsplatz,
normaler Betrieb.
Die Angabe ist das Ergebnis einer Typprufung

gema
 ISO 7779 (EN 27779).

C
Specications C-9

Declaration of Conformity
Manufacturer:

Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Boblingen

Instruments Division
Herrenberger Strae 130
D-71034 Boblingen

Germany

We declare that the product

Product Name: Tunable Laser Source
Model Numbers: HP8167B
HP8168D, HP8168E, HP8168F
Options:
All
conforms to the following standards

Safety:

IEC 1010-1:1990 incl. Addendum 1:1992, EN 61010:1993

IEC 825-1:1993, EN 60825-1:1994

EMC:

EN 55011:1991/CISPR 11, Group 1 Class B

EN 50082-1:1992
IEC 801-2:1991 ESD
4kV cd, 8kV ad
IEC 801-3:1992 Radiated Immunity 3 V/m
IEC 801-4:1988 Fast Transients
0.5 kV, 1 kV

Supplementary Information:

The product herewith complies with the requirements of the

* Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) and the
* EMC Directive (89/336/EEC).
The system also conforms to other standards not listed here. If you need information on
conformance to a particular standard, please contact your local Hewlett-Packard Sales and
Service Oce.
This system was tested in a typical conguration with HP systems.
Boblingen,

4 July 1997

C
C-10 Specications

Wolfgang Fenske
BID Regulations Consultant

D
Performance Tests
Introduction

The procedures in this section test the optical performance of the instrument.
The complete specications to which the HP 8167B/8D/8E/8F is tested are given
in Appendix C. All tests can be performed without access to the interior of the
instrument. The performance tests refer specically to tests using the Diamond
HMS-10/HP connector.

Equipment Required

The equipment required for the performance test is listed in the table below.
Any equipment which satises the critical specications of the equipment given
in the table, may be substituted for the recommended models.

Performance Tests D-1

Equipment Required

Instrument

Description

#021 #022 #023

HP 71452B #E141
HP 8153A
HP 81532A
HP 86120B2

Optical Spectrum Analyzer

Lightwave Multimeter
Power Sensor Module
Multi-Wavelength Meter

1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1

HP 81000AI
HP 81000SI
HP 81000UM

Diamond HMS-10 Connector Interface

DIN 47256 Connector Interface
Universal Through Adapter

2
1
1

HP 81109AC
HP 81102SC
HP 81102AC

Diamond HMS-10/HP/HRL - Diamond HMS-10/HP Patchcord

Diamond HMS-10/HP/HRL - DIN 47250-4108
Diamond HMS-10/HP/HRL - Diamond HMS-10/HP/HRL

1
1

1
1
1

1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1

additional for 8167B and 8168F (max power test only):

HP 81533B
Optical Head Interface Module
HP 81525A
Optical Head
or 81524A
Optical Head and 81001FF, 10dB lter
HP 81000AA
Diamond HMS-10 Connector
1
2

replaces older model HP71450A #009.

replaces older model HP86120A.

Test Record

Results of the performance test may be tabulated on the Test Record provided
at the end of the test procedures. It is recommended that you ll out the Test
Record and refer to it while doing the test. Since the test limits and setup
information are printed on the Test Record for easy reference, the record can
also be used as an abbreviated test procedure (if you are already familiar with
the test procedures). The Test Record can also be used as a permanent record
and may be reproduced without written permission from Hewlett-Packard.

D-2 Performance Tests

Test Failure

If the HP8167B/8D/8E/8F fails any performance test, return the instrument to

the nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales/Service Oce for repair.

Instrument Specication

Specications are the performance characteristics of the instrument which

are certied. These specications, listed in Appendix C, are the performance
standards or limits against which the HP 8167B/8D/8E/8F can be tested.
The specications also list some supplemental characteristics of the HP
8167B/8D/8E/8F. Supplemental characteristics should be considered as additional
information.
Any changes in the specications due to manufacturing changes, design, or
traceability to the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), will be
covered in a manual change supplement, or revised manual. Such specications
supercede any that were previously published.

General

Make sure that all ber connectors are clean

Turn the instruments on, enable the laser and allow the
instruments to warm up until STABILIZING is no longer shown
on the display.

Wavelength Tests

Connect the TLS (DUT) to the Wavelength Meter as shown in Figure D-1.

Note

The connector housings for the patchcord cannot be screwed

fully onto the wavelength meter.
This does not aect the wavelength measurements.

Performance Tests D-3

Figure D-1. Test Setup for the Wavelength Tests

Relative Wavelength Accuracy

1. Set the wavelength meter:
a. Press SYSTEM 4 5.
5.
b. Press DISPLAY 4
c. Press DELTA 4 5.
d. Press MEASUREMENT 4
2. Set the TLS :
Preset

Peak WL

OFF

Cont5

D-4 Performance Tests

3.

4.
5.
6.

7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

a. Switch o Coherence Control.

b. Set the output power to -10dBm (8167B and 8168F to -7dBm), activate
laser output.
Set the wavelength on the TLS to:
HP 8167B
1255nm
HP 8168D
1490nm
HP 8168E
1475nm
HP 8168F
1450nm
Note the displayed wavelength of the wavelength meter in the test report.
Increase wavelength setting on TLS by the steps shown in the test report.
Repeat list item 4 and list item 5 up to
HP 8167B
1365nm
HP 8168D
1565nm
HP 8168E
1575nm
HP 8168F
1590nm
Repeat list item 3 to list item 6 another 4 times.
From each of the repetitions of the measurements, pick the maximum and
minimum deviations, and note these values in the test report.
Pick the largest Maximum Deviation, and note it as the Largest Maximum
Deviation in the test report.
Pick the smallest Minimum Deviation, and note it as the Smallest Minimum
Deviation in the test report.
Calculate the Relative Wavelength Accuracy

Wavelength Repeatability
1. Set the wavelength meter:
a. Press SYSTEM 4 5.
5.
b. Press DISPLAY 4
c. Press DELTA 4 5.
d. Press MEASUREMENT 4
2. Set the TLS (DUT)
Preset

Peak WL

OFF

Cont5

Performance Tests D-5

a. Switch o Coherence Control.

b. Set the output power to -10dBm (8167B and 8168F to -7dBm), activate
laser output.
c. Set the wavelength to
HP 8167B
1350nm
HP 8168D
1565nm
HP 8168E
1575nm
HP 8168F
1575nm
3. Set the TLS to any wavelength in its range and note it in the test record.
4. Set the TLS back to the wavelength setup in list item 3 and wait a few
seconds.
5. Measure the wavelength with the Wavelength Meter and note the result in
test record.
6. Repeat list item 3 to list item 5 with dierent wavelength settings on the TLS
4 times.
7. Set the wavelength of the 8167B to 1365nm, the wavelength of the 8168F to
1595nm, and repeat steps list item 3 to list item 6.

Power Tests
General

Make sure that a second module or a blank insert is installed

in the second slot of the HP 8153A Mainframe.
Turn the instruments on, enable the laser and allow the
instruments to warm up until STABILIZING is no longer on the
display.
Make sure that you keep the relative humidity stable within
65% during measurements.

D-6 Performance Tests

Maximum Output Power

Note

Absolute Power Accuracy is not specied.

The result of the measurement below is greatly in uenced by
the quality and the matching of the used interconnections.

1. Set up the equipment as shown

HP 8168D,E as shown in Figure D-2
HP 8167B,68F as shown in Figure D-3

Performance Tests D-7

Figure D-2.
Test Setup for the Maximum Output Power Test (HP
8168D,E)

D-8 Performance Tests

Note

Figure D-3.
Test Setup for the Maximum Output Power Test (HP
8167B and 8168F)
Instead of the HP81525A, an HP81524A can be used in
conjunction with an HP81001FF 10dB lter. In this case, an
HP81010BL lens is recommended.

2. Set the Power Meter

a. Select Auto Range.
b. Select averaging time 500ms.
Performance Tests D-9

c. Select display in dBm.

3. Set the TLS
a. Set the power to maximum possible value:
i. Press 4
5.
ii. Use the Modify knob to increase the displayed value to the maximum.
b. Set the wavelength to
HP 8167B
1255nm
HP 8168D
1490nm
HP 8168E
1475nm
HP 8168F
1450nm
c. Activate the laser output.
Output Power

Note

The laser output is limited to its maximum possible value at this

wavelength, the display will probably show excessive: P =
x.yy W

4. Measure the output power with the 8153A and note the result for this
wavelength in the test report.
5. Increase the wavelength on the TLS as shown in the test report.
6. Increase the wavelength on the 8153A by the same amount that you have
increased the wavelength the TLS.
7. Repeat list item 4 to list item 6 until the end of the wavelength range of the
TLS is reached.

Power Linearity

1. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure D-4 (HP 8167B, 8168D,E,F).

D-10 Performance Tests

Figure D-4.
Test Setup for the Power Tests (except Maximum Output Power)

2. Set the TLS

a. Set the wavelength to
HP 8167B
1310nm
HP 8168D,E,F 1540nm
b. Set the power to
Performance Tests D-11

8167B
8168D
8168E
8168F
3.

4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

without attenuator with attenuator

+1dBm
0.0dBm
-5dBm
n/a
-1dBm
-2.5dBm
+1dBm
0.0dBm

c. Make sure the optical output is inactive.

Set the Power Meter
a. Zero the 8153A
b. Select Auto Range
c. Select averaging time 500ms
d. Select display in dB
e. Set the wavelength to
HP 8167B
1310nm
HP 8168D,E,F 1540nm
Activate the optical output.
Measure the output power with the Power Meter
Press 4 > 5
Change the power setting on the TLS to the next value listed in the test
report and measure the power again.
Note the displayed value on the Power Meter as \Relative Power of actual
setting".
Calculate the \Power Linearity at current setting" as
\Relative Power of current setting" + \Power Reduction from start
condition"
Repeat list item 7 to list item 8 for all power levels listed the test report.
Check the calculated values of the Power Linearity of the various settings
for the maximum and minimum values and note these in the test report.
Calculate the dierence for the maximum and minimum values of the
Power Linearity of the various settings as Final Power Linearity
DISP-

REF

D-12 Performance Tests

Example

Power Linearity
(HP 8168D without attenuator)
Power
Relative
Power
Power
Setting
Power Reduction Linearity
at current
from
at current
setting
start
setting
+
=
start: -5.0dBm
REF
0.0dB
0.00dB

-5.5dBm

-0.55dB

0.5dB

-0.05dB

-6.0dBm

-1.01dB

1.0dB

-0.01dB

-6.5dBm

-1.47dB

1.5dB

+0.03dB

-7.0dBm

-2.03dB

2.0dB

-0.03dB

-7.5dBm

-2.52dB

2.5dB

-0.02dB

-8.0dBm

-2.94dB

3.0dB

+0.06dB

-8.5dBm

-3.52dB

3.5dB

-0.02dB

-9.0dBm

-4.03dB

4.0dB

-0.03dB

-9.5dBm

-4.54dB

4.5dB

-0.04dB

-10.0dBm

-4.98dB

5.0dB

+0.02dB

Maximum Power Linearity at current setting +0.06dB

Minimum Power Linearity at current setting -0.05dB
Final Power Linearity
(= Max Power Linearity - Min Power Linearity) 0.11dBpp
Specication 0.2dBpp

Performance Tests D-13

Power Flatness over Wavelength

1. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure D-4 (HP 8167B, 8168D,E,F).

2. Set the TLS
a. Set the power to:
#023 #003 #023+#003 #007
8167B -3dBm -4dBm -4.5dBm
-5.5dBm -4dBm
8168D -4dBm n/a
n/a
n/a -5dBm
8168E 0dBm -1dBm -1.5dBm
-2.5dBm -1dBm
8168F +1dBm 0dBm -0.5dBm
-2.5dBm 0dBm

3.

b. Set the wavelength to

HP 8167B
1260nm
HP 8168D
1500nm
HP 8168E
1500nm
HP 8168F
1475nm
Set the Power Meter
a. Select Auto Range.
b. Select averaging time 500ms.
c. Select display in dB.
d. Set the wavelength to
HP 8167B
1260nm
HP 8168D
1500nm
HP 8168E
1500nm
HP 8168F
1475nm
e. Set 4 > 5
Increase the wavelength on the TLS and on the Power Meter by the steps
listed in the test record. Measure the output power.
Note the result in the test record
repeat list item 4 for the wavelength settings given in the test record.
From the measurement results calculate the dierence between the
maximum and minimum deviation from REF and note the result as Flatness.
DISP-

4.
5.
6.

REF

D-14 Performance Tests

Power Stability

1. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure D-4 (HP 8167B, 8168D,E,F).

2. Set the TLS
a. Set the wavelength to
HP 8167B
1310nm
HP 8168D,E,F 1540nm
b. Set the power to high power
#023 #003 #023+#003 #007
8167B +1dBm +1dBm +1dBm +0.5dBm +0.5dBm
8168D -4dBm
n/a
n/a
n/a -5dBm
8168E 0dBm -1dBm -1.5dBm
-2.5dBm -1dBm
8168F +1dBm +1dBm +1dBm
+1dBm
0dBm
c. Deactivate the laser output.
3. Set the Power Meter
a. Zero the 8153A.
b. Select Auto Range.
c. Select averaging time 500ms.
d. Select display in dB.
e. Set the wavelength to
HP 8167B
1310nm
HP 8168D,E,F 1540nm
f. Set 8153A to Logging, T Total = 1 hour:
i. Press 4 5.
5 to get STABILITY .
ii. Press 4
iii. Press 4 5 to get T_TOTAL and modify the display until it shows
01:00:00.
iv. Press 4 5.
4. Activate the optical output of the laser source, and wait 1 minute.
Menu

Record
Edit

Edit

Performance Tests D-15

5. On the power meter, press 4 5.

Display will show RUNNING (blinking ) a few moments then show the
remaining time. When logging time is over the display will show STABILITY.
6. Get the results
a. Press 4 5 to get SHOW.
b. Press 4 5 to get MAXIMUM.
Note the value in the test record.
c. Press 4 5 to get MINIMUM.
Note the value in the test record.
d. Press 4 5, and 4 5 to return to normal operation.
7. Calculate the Stability as the dierence between the maximum and the
minimum.
8. Set the TLS to low output power:
Exec

More
Edit

Next

Mode

Edit

8167B -7dBm
8168D -10 dBm
8168E -10dBm
8168F -7dBm

#003
-47dBm
n/a
-50dBm
-47dBm

9. Repeat list item 5 to list item 7 and note the results in the test report.

Source Spontaneous Emission

1. Connect the TLS (DUT) to the wavelength meter as shown in Figure D-5.

D-16 Performance Tests

Figure D-5. Test Setup for the Source Spontaneous Emission Test

2. Set the Optical Spectrum Analyzer

a. Set the Span to 4nm, Resolution Bandwidth to 0.1nm and the Sensitivity
to -60dBm.
(Waveln -> SPAN ->f4g -> nm -> BW.SWP -> f0.1g -> nm; Amptd ->
SENS Man -> f-60g -> dBm)
b. Set the wavelength to the wavelength of the TLS.
(Waveln -> fxxxx.000g -> nm)

Performance Tests D-17

3. Set the TLS:

Set the power to high power as stated in the test report.
4. On the spectrum analyzer, set the Marker to the highest peak and select
delta. (Marker -> HIGHEST PEAK -> DELTA)
5. Using the MODIFY knob move the second marker to the highest peak of the
displayed side modes and note the delta between the 2 markers in the test
report.
6. Repeat list item 4 to list item 5 within the wavelength range of the TLS in
10nm steps.

D-18 Performance Tests

Performance Test for the HP 8167B

Page 1 of 14

Test Facility:
Report No.
Date
Customer
Tested By
Model

HP 8167B Tunable Laser Source

Serial No.

Ambient temperature

C

Options

Relative humidity

Firmware Rev.

Line frequency

Hz

Special Notes:

Performance Tests D-19

Performance Test for the HP 8167B

Model HP 8167B Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Test Equipment Used:
Description

Model No.

1. Lightwave Multimeter with

HP 8153A

2. Sensor Module

HP 81532A

3a. Optical Spectrum Analyzer

3b. Optical Spectrum Analyzer
3c OSA Display

HP 71452B
HP 70950A
HP 70004A

4. Wavelength Meter
5a. Connector Interface (22)
5b. Connector Interface (#021)

HP 81000AI
HP 81000AI

6. Connector Interface (#022)

HP 81000SI

7. Universal Through Adapter

(#021, #022)

HP 81000UM

8a. High Return Loss Cable

HP 81109AC
8b. High Return Loss Cable (#021) HP 81109AC
9. High Return Loss Cable
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
D-20 Performance Tests

HP 81102SC

Page 2 of 14
Date

Trace No. Cal. Due Date

Performance Test for the HP 8167B

Model HP 8167B Tunable Laser Source Report No.
Date
Relative Wavelength Accuracy
Wavelength Wavelength
Deviation
Repetition
Setting
Measured
meas - set value
1

1255.000nm

nm

nm

1260.000nm

nm

nm

1270.000nm

nm

nm

1280.000nm

nm

nm

1290.000nm

nm

nm

1300.000nm

nm

nm

1310.000nm

nm

nm

1320.000nm

nm

nm

1330.000nm

nm

nm

1340.000nm

nm

nm

1350.000nm

nm

nm 1310 to 1350nm

1360.000nm

nm

nm

1365.000nm

nm

nm 1255 to 1365nm

Page 3 of 14
Maximum
Deviation

Minimum
Deviation

nm

nm

nm

nm

Performance Tests D-21

Performance Test for the HP 8167B

Model HP 8167B Tunable Laser Source Report No.
Date
Relative Wavelength Accuracy
Wavelength Wavelength
Deviation
Repetition
Setting
Measured
meas - set value
2

1255.000nm

nm

nm

1260.000nm

nm

nm

1270.000nm

nm

nm

1280.000nm

nm

nm

1290.000nm

nm

nm

1300.000nm

nm

nm

1310.000nm

nm

nm

1320.000nm

nm

nm

1330.000nm

nm

nm

1340.000nm

nm

nm

1350.000nm

nm

nm 1310 to 1350nm

1360.000nm

nm

nm

1365.000nm

nm

nm 1255 to 1365nm

D-22 Performance Tests

Page 4 of 14
Maximum
Deviation

Minimum
Deviation

nm

nm

nm

nm

Performance Test for the HP 8167B

Model HP 8167B Tunable Laser Source Report No.
Date
Relative Wavelength Accuracy
Wavelength Wavelength
Deviation
Repetition
Setting
Measured
meas - set value
3

1255.000nm

nm

nm

1260.000nm

nm

nm

1270.000nm

nm

nm

1280.000nm

nm

nm

1290.000nm

nm

nm

1300.000nm

nm

nm

1310.000nm

nm

nm

1320.000nm

nm

nm

1330.000nm

nm

nm

1340.000nm

nm

nm

1350.000nm

nm

nm 1310 to 1350nm

1360.000nm

nm

nm

1365.000nm

nm

nm 1255 to 1365nm

Page 5 of 14
Maximum
Deviation

Minimum
Deviation

nm

nm

nm

nm

Performance Tests D-23

Performance Test for the HP 8167B

Model HP 8167B Tunable Laser Source Report No.
Date
Relative Wavelength Accuracy
Wavelength Wavelength
Deviation
Repetition
Setting
Measured
meas - set value
4

1255.000nm

nm

nm

1260.000nm

nm

nm

1270.000nm

nm

nm

1280.000nm

nm

nm

1290.000nm

nm

nm

1300.000nm

nm

nm

1310.000nm

nm

nm

1320.000nm

nm

nm

1330.000nm

nm

nm

1340.000nm

nm

nm

1350.000nm

nm

nm 1310 to 1350nm

1360.000nm

nm

nm

1365.000nm

nm

nm 1255 to 1365nm

D-24 Performance Tests

Page 6 of 14
Maximum
Deviation

Minimum
Deviation

nm

nm

nm

nm

Performance Test for the HP 8167B

Model HP 8167B Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Relative Wavelength Accuracy

Wavelength
Wavelength
Repetition
Setting
Measured
5

Date

Deviation

Maximum
Deviation

meas - set value

1255.000nm

nm

nm

1260.000nm

nm

nm

1270.000nm

nm

nm

1280.000nm

nm

nm

1290.000nm

nm

nm

1300.000nm

nm

nm

1310.000nm

nm

nm

1320.000nm

nm

nm

1330.000nm

nm

nm

1340.000nm

nm

nm

1350.000nm

nm

nm

1360.000nm

nm

nm

1365.000nm

nm

nm

Range 1310 to 1350nm

nm

nm

1255 to 1365nm

nm

nm

Largest Maximum Deviation

nm
nm

Relative Wavelength Accuracy

(= Largest Maximum Deviation - Smallest Minimum Deviation)

Specication
0.07nm
Largest Maximum Deviation

nm

nm

Smallest Minimum Deviation

Relative Wavelength Accuracy

nm

(= Largest Maximum Deviation - Smallest Minimum Deviation)

Specication
0.10nm
Measurement Uncertainty

Minimum
Deviation

1310 to 1350nm

Smallest Minimum Deviation

Range 1255 to 1365nm

Page 7 of 14

nm

60.01nm
Performance Tests D-25

Performance Test for the HP 8167B

Model HP 8167B Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Wavelength Repeatability
Description
1350.000nm

Min Spec

Result
REF

Date
Max Spec

nm to REF 1349.965nm

nm 1350.035nm

from

nm to REF 1349.965nm

nm 1350.035nm

from

nm to REF 1349.965nm

nm 1350.035nm

from

nm to REF 1349.965nm

nm 1350.035nm

from

nm to REF 1349.965nm

nm 1350.035nm

Wavelength Repeatability
Min Spec

Result
REF

Max Spec

Measurement
Uncertainty

60.002nm

from

nm to REF 1364.950nm

nm 1365.050nm

from

nm to REF 1364.950nm

nm 1365.050nm

from

nm to REF 1364.950nm

nm 1365.050nm

from

nm to REF 1364.950nm

nm 1365.050nm

from

nm to REF 1364.950nm

nm 1365.050nm

D-26 Performance Tests

Measurement
Uncertainty

60.002nm

from

Description
1365.000nm

Page 8 of 14

Performance Test for the HP 8167B

Model HP 8167B Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Maximum Power Test
Wavelength

option

Minimum Spec

std

Page 9 of 14

Date
Result

Measurement
Uncertainty

60.30dB

#007
#023
#003 #023+#003
(circle the appropriate)

1255nm

-7.0dBm -8.0dBm -8.5dBm

-9.5dBm

dBm

1260nm

-3.0dBm -4.0dBm -4.5dBm

-5.5dBm

dBm

1270nm

-3.0dBm -4.0dBm -4.5dBm

-5.5dBm

dBm

1280nm

-3.0dBm -4.0dBm -4.5dBm

-5.5dBm

dBm

1290nm

-3.0dBm -4.0dBm -4.5dBm

-5.5dBm

dBm

1300nm

-3.0dBm -4.0dBm -4.5dBm

-5.5dBm

dBm

1310nm

+3.0dBm +2.0dBm +1.5dBm +0.5dBm

dBm

1320nm

+3.0dBm +2.0dBm +1.5dBm +0.5dBm

dBm

1330nm

+3.0dBm +2.0dBm +1.5dBm +0.5dBm

dBm

1340nm

+3.0dBm +2.0dBm +1.5dBm +0.5dBm

dBm

1350nm

+3.0dBm +2.0dBm +1.5dBm +0.5dBm

dBm

1360nm

-3.0dBm -4.0dBm -4.5dBm

-5.5dBm

dBm

1365nm

-7.0dBm -8.0dBm -8.5dBm

-9.5dBm

dBm

Performance Tests D-27

Performance Test for the HP 8167B

Model HP 8167B Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Power Linearity
(HP 8167B without attenuator)
Power
Setting
at current
setting

start: +1.0dBm

Relative
Power
from
start

REF

Page 10 of 14
Date

Power
Power
Reduction Linearity
at current
setting
+
=
0.0dB
0.00dB

0.0dBm

dB

1.0dB

dB

-1.0dBm

dB

2.0dB

dB

-2.0dBm

dB

3.0dB

dB

-3.0dBm

dB

4.0dB

dB

-4.0dBm

dB

5.0dB

dB

-5.0dBm

dB

6.0dB

dB

-6.0dBm

dB

7.0dB

dB

-7.0dBm

dB

8.0dB

dB

Maximum Power Linearity at current setting

dB

Minimum Power Linearity at current setting

dB

Final Power Linearity

(= Max Power Linearity - Min Power Linearity)
Specication

Measurement Uncertainty

D-28 Performance Tests

dBpp
0.2dBpp

60.05dB

Performance Test for the HP 8167B

Model HP 8167B Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Power Linearity
(HP 8167B with attenuator)

Page 11 of 14
Date

Power
Relative
Power
Power
Setting
Power Reduction Linearity
at current
from
at current
setting
start
setting
+
=
start: 0.0dBm
REF dB
0.0dB
0.00 dB

-5.0dBm

dB

5.0dB

dB

-10.0dBm

dB

10.0dB

dB

-15.0dBm

dB

15.0dB

dB

-20.0dBm

dB

20.0dB

dB

-25.0dBm

dB

25.0dB

dB

-30.0dBm

dB

30.0dB

dB

-35.0dBm

dB

35.0dB

dB

-40.0dBm

dB

40.0dB

dB

-47.0dBm

dB

47.0dB

dB

Maximum Power Linearity at current setting

dB

Minimum Power Linearity at current setting

dB

Final Power Linearity

(= Max Power Linearity - Min Power Linearity)
Specication

Measurement Uncertainty

dBpp
0.6dBpp

60.05dB
Performance Tests D-29

Performance Test for the HP 8167B

Model HP 8167B Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Power Flatness versus Wavelength
Wavelength
Deviation
1260nm

Date

0.00 (start value, REF)

1270nm

dB

1280nm

dB

1290nm

dB

1300nm

dB

1310nm

dB

1320nm

dB

1330nm

dB

1340nm

dB

1350nm

dB

1360nm

dB
Maximum deviation

dB

Minimum deviation

dB

Flatness
(= Maximum - Minimum deviation)
dBpp
Specication 0.2dBpp without #003
0.4dBpp with #003

Measurement Uncertainty

D-30 Performance Tests

Page 12 of 14

60.07dB

Performance Test for the HP 8167B

Page 13 of 14

Model HP 8167B Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Date
Power Stability
High power
Low power
Maximum deviation

dB

Maximum deviation

dB

Minimum deviation

dB

Minimum deviation

dB

Power Stability
(= Max - Min deviation)
Specication

dBpp
0.06dBpp

Power Stability
(= Max - Min deviation)
Specication

dBpp
0.06dBpp

Measurement Uncertainty 60.02dB

Performance Tests D-31

Performance Test for the HP 8167B

Model HP 8167B Tunable Laser Source Report No.
Source Spontaneous Emission

Date

Output
Maximum
Power
Spec
#007
#023
#003 #023+#003
(circle the appropriate)

Wavelength

option:

Page 14 of 14
Measurement
Uncertainty

Result

61.20dB

1255nm

-7.0dBm

-8.0dBm -8.5dBm

-9.5dBm

-35dB

dB

1260nm

-3.0dBm

-4.0dBm -4.5dBm

-5.5dBm

-40dB

dB

1270nm

-3.0dBm

-4.0dBm -4.5dBm

-5.5dBm

-40dB

dB

1280nm

-3.0dBm

-4.0dBm -4.5dBm

-5.5dBm

-40dB

dB

1290nm

-3.0dBm

-4.0dBm -4.5dBm

-5.5dBm

-40dB

dB

1300nm

-3.0dBm

-4.0dBm -4.5dBm

-5.5dBm

-40dB

dB

1310nm

+3.0dBm

+2.0dBm +1.5dBm +0.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1320nm

+3.0dBm

+2.0dBm +1.5dBm +0.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1330nm

+3.0dBm

+2.0dBm +1.5dBm +0.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1340nm

+3.0dBm

+2.0dBm +1.5dBm +0.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1350nm

+3.0dBm

+2.0dBm +1.5dBm +0.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1360nm

-3.0dBm

-4.0dBm -4.5dBm

-5.5dBm

-40dB

dB

1365nm

-7.0dBm

-8.0dBm -8.5dBm

-9.5dBm

-35dB

dB

D-32 Performance Tests

Performance Test for the HP 8168D

Page 1 of 11

Test Facility:
Report No.
Date
Customer
Tested By
Model

HP 8168D Tunable Laser Source

Serial No.

Ambient temperature

C

Options

Relative humidity

Firmware Rev.

Line frequency

Hz

Special Notes:

Performance Tests D-33

Performance Test for the HP 8168D

Model HP 8168D Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Test Equipment Used:
Description

Model No.

1. Lightwave Multimeter with

HP 8153A

2. Sensor Module

HP 81532A

3a. Optical Spectrum Analyzer

3b. Optical Spectrum Analyzer
3c. OSA Display

HP 71452B
HP 70950A
HP 70004A

4. Wavelength Meter
5a. Connector Interface (22)
5b. Connector Interface (#021)

HP 81000AI
HP 81000AI

6. Connector Interface (#022)

HP 81000SI

7. Universal Through Adapter

(#021, #022)

HP 81000UM

8a. High Return Loss Cable

HP 81109AC
8b. High Return Loss Cable (#021) HP 81109AC
9. High Return Loss Cable
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
D-34 Performance Tests

HP 81102SC

Page 2 of 11
Date

Trace No. Cal. Due Date

Performance Test for the HP 8168D

Page 3 of 11

Model HP 8168D Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Date
Relative Wavelength Accuracy
Wavelength Wavelength
Deviation
Maximum
Repetition
Setting
Measured
meas - set value Deviation
1

1490.000nm

nm

nm

1500.000nm

nm

nm

1510.000nm

nm

nm

1520.000nm

nm

nm

1530.000nm

nm

nm

1540.000nm

nm

nm

1550.000nm

nm

nm

1560.000nm

nm

nm

1565.000nm

nm

nm

1490.000nm

nm

nm

1500.000nm

nm

nm

1510.000nm

nm

nm

1520.000nm

nm

nm

1530.000nm

nm

nm

1540.000nm

nm

nm

1550.000nm

nm

nm

1560.000nm

nm

nm

1565.000nm

nm

nm

Minimum
Deviation

nm

nm

nm

nm

Performance Tests D-35

Performance Test for the HP 8168D

Page 4 of 11

Model HP 8168D Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Date
Relative Wavelength Accuracy
Wavelength Wavelength
Deviation
Maximum
Repetition
Setting
Measured
meas - set value Deviation
3

1490.000nm

nm

nm

1500.000nm

nm

nm

1510.000nm

nm

nm

1520.000nm

nm

nm

1530.000nm

nm

nm

1540.000nm

nm

nm

1550.000nm

nm

nm

1560.000nm

nm

nm

1565.000nm

nm

nm

1490.000nm

nm

nm

1500.000nm

nm

nm

1510.000nm

nm

nm

1520.000nm

nm

nm

1530.000nm

nm

nm

1540.000nm

nm

nm

1550.000nm

nm

nm

1560.000nm

nm

nm

1565.000nm

nm

nm

D-36 Performance Tests

Minimum
Deviation

nm

nm

nm

nm

Performance Test for the HP 8168D

Model HP 8168D Tunable Laser Source Report No.
Date
Relative Wavelength Accuracy
Wavelength Wavelength
Deviation
Repetition
Setting
Measured
meas - set value
5

1490.000nm

nm

nm

1500.000nm

nm

nm

1510.000nm

nm

nm

1520.000nm

nm

nm

1530.000nm

nm

nm

1540.000nm

nm

nm

1550.000nm

nm

nm

1560.000nm

nm

nm

1565.000nm

nm

nm

Page 5 of 11
Maximum
Deviation

nm

Largest Maximum Deviation

nm

nm

Smallest Minimum Deviation

nm

Relative Wavelength Accuracy

(= Largest Maximum Deviation - Smallest Minimum Deviation)
Specication
0.2nm

Measurement Uncertainty

Minimum
Deviation

nm

60.01nm

Performance Tests D-37

Performance Test for the HP 8168D

Model HP 8168D Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Wavelength Repeatability
Description
1565.000nm

Min Spec

Result
REF

Date
Max Spec

Measurement
Uncertainty

60.002nm

from

nm to REF 1564.965nm

nm 1565.035nm

from

nm to REF 1564.965nm

nm 1565.035nm

from

nm to REF 1564.965nm

nm 1565.035nm

from

nm to REF 1564.965nm

nm 1565.035nm

from

nm to REF 1564.965nm

nm 1565.035nm

D-38 Performance Tests

Page 6 of 11

Performance Test for the HP 8168D

Model HP 8168D Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Maximum Power Test
Wavelength

option:

Minimum Spec

Result

Page 7 of 11
Date

Measurement
Uncertainty

60.30dB

std
#007
(circle the appropriate)

1490nm

-10.0dBm -11.0dBm

dBm

1500nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

dBm

1510nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

dBm

1520nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

dBm

1530nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

dBm

1540nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

dBm

1550nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

dBm

1560nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

dBm

1565nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

dBm

Performance Tests D-39

Performance Test for the HP 8168D

Model HP 8168D Tunable Laser Source Report No.
Power Linearity
(HP 8168D)
Power
Relative
Power
Setting
Power
Reduction
at
from
at
current setting
start
current setting
+
=
start:
-5.0dBm
REF
0.0dB

Date
Power
Linearity

0.00dB

-5.5dBm

dB

0.5dB

dB

-6.0dBm

dB

1.0dB

dB

-6.5dBm

dB

1.5dB

dB

-7.0dBm

dB

2.0dB

dB

-7.5dBm

dB

2.5dB

dB

-8.0dBm

dB

3.0dB

dB

-8.5dBm

dB

3.5dB

dB

-9.0dBm

dB

4.0dB

dB

-9.5dBm

dB

4.5dB

dB

-10.0dBm

dB

5.0dB

dB

Maximum Power Linearity at current setting

dB

Minimum Power Linearity at current setting

dB

Final Power Linearity

(= Max Power Linearity - Min Power Linearity)
Specication

Measurement Uncertainty

D-40 Performance Tests

Page 8 of 11

dBpp
0.2dBpp

60.05dB

Performance Test for the HP 8168D

Model HP 8168D Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Power Flatness versus Wavelength
Wavelength
Deviation
1500nm
0.00 (start value, REF)
1510nm

dB

1520nm

dB

1530nm

dB

1540nm

dB

1550nm

dB

1560nm

dB

1565nm

dB
Maximum deviation

dB

Minimum deviation

dB

Flatness
(= Maximum - Minimum deviation)
Specication

Measurement Uncertainty

Page 9 of 11
Date

dBpp
0.4dBpp
0.2dBpp typical

60.07dB

Performance Tests D-41

Performance Test for the HP 8168D

Page 10 of 11

Model HP 8168D Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Date
Power Stability
High power
Low power
Maximum deviation

dB

Maximum deviation

dB

Minimum deviation

dB

Minimum deviation

dB

Power Stability
(= Max - Min deviation)
Specication

dBpp
0.06dBpp

Power Stability
(= Max - Min deviation)
Specication

Measurement Uncertainty 60.02dB

D-42 Performance Tests

dBpp
0.06dBpp

Performance Test for the HP 8168D

Model HP 8168D Tunable Laser Source Report No.
Source Spontaneous Emission
Wavelength

option:

Output
Power

#007
(circle the appropriate)

Maximum
Spec

Page 11 of 11

Date
Measurement
Uncertainty

Result

61.20dB

1490nm

-10.0dBm

-11.0dBm

-35dB

dB

1500nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

-40dB

dB

1510nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

-40dB

dB

1520nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

-40dB

dB

1530nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

-40dB

dB

1540nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

-40dB

dB

1550nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

-40dB

dB

1560nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

-40dB

dB

1565nm

-4.0dBm

-5.0dBm

-40dB

dB

Performance Tests D-43

Performance Test for the HP 8168E

Page 1 of 12

Test Facility:
Report No.
Date
Customer
Tested By
Model

HP 8168E Tunable Laser Source

Serial No.

Ambient temperature

C

Options

Relative humidity

Firmware Rev.

Line frequency

Hz

Special Notes:

D-44 Performance Tests

Performance Test for the HP 8168E

Model HP 8168E Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Test Equipment Used:
Description

Model No.

1. Lightwave Multimeter with

HP 8153A

2. Sensor Module

HP 81532A

3a. Optical Spectrum Analyzer

3b. Optical Spectrum Analyzer
3c. OSA Display

Page 2 of 12
Date

Trace No. Cal. Due Date

HP 71452B
HP 70950A
HP 70004A

4. Wavelength Meter
5a. Connector Interface (22)
5b. Connector Interface (#021)

HP 81000AI
HP 81000AI

6. Connector Interface (#022)

HP 81000SI

7. Universal Through Adapter

(#021, #022)

HP 81000UM

8a. High Return Loss Cable

HP 81109AC
8b. High Return Loss Cable (#021) HP 81109AC
9. High Return Loss Cable

HP 81102SC

10a. Optical Head Interfacer Module HP 81533B

10b Optical Head
HP 81525A
10c Diamond HMS-10 Connector
HP 81000AA
11.
12.
13.
14.
Performance Tests D-45

Performance Test for the HP 8168E

Model HP 8168E Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Relative Wavelength Accuracy

Wavelength
Wavelength
Repetition
Setting
Measured
1

Date

Deviation

meas - set value

1475.000nm

nm

nm

1485.000nm

nm

nm

1495.000nm

nm

nm

1505.000nm

nm

nm

1515.000nm

nm

nm

1525.000nm

nm

nm

1535.000nm

nm

nm

1545.000nm

nm

nm

1555.000nm

nm

nm

1565.000nm

nm

nm

1575.000nm

nm

nm

1475.000nm

nm

nm

1485.000nm

nm

nm

1495.000nm

nm

nm

1505.000nm

nm

nm

1515.000nm

nm

nm

1525.000nm

nm

nm

1535.000nm

nm

nm

1545.000nm

nm

nm

1555.000nm

nm

nm

1565.000nm

nm

nm

1575.000nm

nm

nm

D-46 Performance Tests

Page 3 of 12

Maximum
Deviation

Minimum
Deviation

nm

nm

nm

nm

Performance Test for the HP 8168E

Model HP 8168E Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Relative Wavelength Accuracy

Wavelength
Wavelength
Repetition
Setting
Measured
3

Page 4 of 12

Date

Deviation

meas - set value

1475.000nm

nm

nm

1485.000nm

nm

nm

1495.000nm

nm

nm

1505.000nm

nm

nm

1515.000nm

nm

nm

1525.000nm

nm

nm

1535.000nm

nm

nm

1545.000nm

nm

nm

1555.000nm

nm

nm

1565.000nm

nm

nm

1575.000nm

nm

nm

1475.000nm

nm

nm

1485.000nm

nm

nm

1495.000nm

nm

nm

1505.000nm

nm

nm

1515.000nm

nm

nm

1525.000nm

nm

nm

1535.000nm

nm

nm

1545.000nm

nm

nm

1555.000nm

nm

nm

1565.000nm

nm

nm

1575.000nm

nm

nm

Maximum
Deviation

Minimum
Deviation

nm

nm

nm

nm

Performance Tests D-47

Performance Test for the HP 8168E

Model HP 8168E Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Relative Wavelength Accuracy

Wavelength
Wavelength
Repetition
Setting
Measured
5

Date

Deviation

meas - set value

1475.000nm

nm

nm

1485.000nm

nm

nm

1495.000nm

nm

nm

1505.000nm

nm

nm

1515.000nm

nm

nm

1525.000nm

nm

nm

1535.000nm

nm

nm

1545.000nm

nm

nm

1555.000nm

nm

nm

1565.000nm

nm

nm

1575.000nm

nm

nm

Range 1475 to 1575nm

Page 5 of 12

Maximum
Deviation

nm

Largest Maximum Deviation

nm

Relative Wavelength Accuracy

(= Largest Maximum Deviation - Smallest Minimum Deviation)

Specication
0.07nm

D-48 Performance Tests

nm

nm

Smallest Minimum Deviation

Measurement Uncertainty

Minimum
Deviation

60.01nm

nm

Performance Test for the HP 8168E

Model HP 8168E Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Wavelength Repeatability
Description
1575.000nm

Min Spec

Result
REF

Page 6 of 12

Date
Max Spec

Measurement
Uncertainty

60.002nm

from

nm to REF 1574.965nm

nm 1575.035nm

from

nm to REF 1574.965nm

nm 1575.035nm

from

nm to REF 1574.965nm

nm 1575.035nm

from

nm to REF 1574.965nm

nm 1575.035nm

from

nm to REF 1574.965nm

nm 1575.035nm

Performance Tests D-49

Performance Test for the HP 8168E

Model HP 8168E Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Maximum Power Test
Wavelength

Minimum Spec

#007
option:
#023
(circle the appropriate)

#003

Page 7 of 12

Date
Result

60.30dB

#023+#003

1475nm

-10.0dBm -11.0dBm -11.5dBm -12.5dBm

dBm

1480nm

-10.0dBm -11.0dBm -11.5dBm -12.5dBm

dBm

1490nm

-10.0dBm -11.0dBm -11.5dBm -12.5dBm

dBm

1500nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

dBm

1510nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

dBm

1520nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

dBm

1530nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

dBm

1540nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

dBm

1550nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

dBm

1560nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

dBm

1570nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

dBm

-10.0dBm -11.0dBm -11.5dBm -12.5dBm

dBm

1575nm

D-50 Performance Tests

Measurement
Uncertainty

Performance Test for the HP 8168E

Page 8 of 12

Model HP 8168E Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Date
Power Linearity
(HP 8168E without attenuator)
Power
Relative
Power
Power
Setting
Power
Reduction Linearity
at current
from
at current
setting
start
setting
+
=
start: -1.0dBm
REF
0.0dB
0.00dB
-1.5dBm
dB
0.5dB
dB
-2.0dBm
dB
1.0dB
dB
-2.5dBm
dB
1.5dB
dB
-3.0dBm
dB
2.0dB
dB
-3.5dBm
dB
2.5dB
dB
-4.0dBm
dB
3.0dB
dB
-4.5dBm
dB
3.5dB
dB
-5.0dBm
dB
4.0dB
dB
-5.5dBm
dB
4.5dB
dB
-6.0dBm
dB
5.0dB
dB
-6.5dBm
dB
5.5dB
dB
-7.0dBm
dB
6.0dB
dB
-7.5dBm
dB
6.5dB
dB
-8.0dBm
dB
7.0dB
dB
-8.5dBm
dB
7.5dB
dB
-9.0dBm
dB
8.0dB
dB
-9.5dBm
dB
8.5dB
dB
-10.0dBm
dB
9.0dB
dB
Maximum Power Linearity at current setting

dB

Minimum Power Linearity at current setting

dB

Final Power Linearity

(= Max Power Linearity - Min Power Linearity)
Specication

Measurement Uncertainty

dBpp
0.2dBpp

60.05dB
Performance Tests D-51

Performance Test for the HP 8168E

Model HP 8168E Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Power Linearity
(HP 8168E with attenuator)
Power
Relative
Power
Power
Setting
Power Reduction Linearity
at current
from
at current
setting
start
setting
+
=
start: -2.5dBm
REF
0.0dB
0.00dB
-10.0dBm

dB

7.5dB

dB

-15.0dBm

dB

12.5dB

dB

-20.0dBm

dB

17.5dB

dB

-25.0dBm

dB

22.5dB

dB

-30.0dBm

dB

27.5dB

dB

-35.0dBm

dB

32.5dB

dB

-40.0dBm

dB

37.5dB

dB

-45.0dBm

dB

42.5dB

dB

-50.0dBm

dB

47.5dB

dB

Page 9 of 12
Date

Maximum Power Linearity at current setting

dB

Minimum Power Linearity at current setting

dB

Final Power Linearity

(= Max Power Linearity - Min Power Linearity)
Specication

Measurement Uncertainty
D-52 Performance Tests

dBpp
0.6dBpp

60.05dB

Performance Test for the HP 8168E

Page 10 of 12

Model HP 8168E Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Power Flatness versus Wavelength
Wavelength
Deviation
1500nm

Date

0.00 (start value, REF)

1510nm

dB

1520nm

dB

1530nm

dB

1540nm

dB

1550nm

dB

1560nm

dB

1570nm

dB
Maximum deviation

dB

Minimum deviation

dB

Flatness
(= Maximum - Minimum deviation)
dBpp
Specication 0.2dBpp without #003
0.4dBpp with #003

Measurement Uncertainty

60.07dB

Performance Tests D-53

Performance Test for the HP 8168E

Page 11 of 12

Model HP 8168E Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Date
Power Stability
High power
Low power
Maximum deviation

dB

Maximum deviation

dB

Minimum deviation

dB

Minimum deviation

dB

Power Stability
(= Max - Min deviation)
Specication

dBpp
0.06dBpp

Power Stability
(= Max - Min deviation)
Specication

Measurement Uncertainty 60.02dB

D-54 Performance Tests

dBpp
0.06dBpp

Performance Test for the HP 8168E

Model HP 8168E Tunable Laser Source Report No.
Source Spontaneous Emission

Date

Output
Maximum
Power
Spec
#007
#023
#003 #023+#003
(circle the appropriate)

Wavelength

option:

Page 12 of 12
Measurement
Uncertainty

Result

61.20dB

1475m

-10.0dBm

-11.0dBm -11.5dBm -12.5dBm

-35dB

dB

1480nm

-10.0dBm

-11.0dBm -11.5dBm -12.5dBm

-35dB

dB

1490nm

-10.0dBm

-11.0dBm -11.5dBm -12.5dBm

-35dB

dB

1500nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1510nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1520nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1530nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1540nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1550nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1560nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1570nm

0dBm

-1.0dBm -1.5dBm

-2.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1575nm

-10.0dBm

-11.0dBm -11.5dBm -12.5dBm

-35dB

dB

Performance Tests D-55

Performance Test for the HP 8168F

Page 1 of 14

Test Facility:
Report No.
Date
Customer
Tested By
Model

HP 8168F Tunable Laser Source

Serial No.

Ambient temperature

C

Options

Relative humidity

Firmware Rev.

Line frequency

Hz

Special Notes:

D-56 Performance Tests

Performance Test for the HP 8168F

Page 2 of 14

Model HP 8168F Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Date
Test Equipment Used:
Description
Model No. Trace No. Cal. Due Date
1. Lightwave Multimeter with

HP 8153A

2. Sensor Module

HP 81532A

3a. Optical Spectrum Analyzer

3b. Optical Spectrum Analyzer
3c. OSA Display

HP 71452B
HP 70950A
HP 70004A

4. Wavelength Meter
5a. Connector Interface (22)
5b. Connector Interface (#021)

HP 81000AI
HP 81000AI

6. Connector Interface (#022)

HP 81000SI

7. Universal Through Adapter

(#021, #022)

HP 81000UM

8a. High Return Loss Cable

HP 81109AC
8b. High Return Loss Cable (#021) HP 81109AC
9. High Return Loss Cable

HP 81102SC

10a. Optical Head Interfacer Module HP 81533B

10b Optical Head
HP 81525A
or HP81524A
10c Diamond HMS-10 Connector
HP 81000AA
11.
12.
13.
14.
Performance Tests D-57

Performance Test for the HP 8168F

Model HP 8168F Tunable Laser Source Report No.
Date
Relative Wavelength Accuracy
Wavelength Wavelength
Deviation
Repetition
Setting
Measured
meas - set value
1

1450.000nm

nm

nm

1460.000nm

nm

nm

1475.000nm

nm

nm

1490.000nm

nm

nm

1500.000nm

nm

nm

1510.000nm

nm

nm

1520.000nm

nm

nm

1530.000nm

nm

nm

1540.000nm

nm

nm

1550.000nm

nm

nm

1560.000nm

nm

nm

1575.000nm

nm

nm 1475 to 1575nm

1580.000nm

nm

nm

1590.000nm

nm

nm 1450 to 1590nm

D-58 Performance Tests

Page 3 of 14
Maximum
Deviation

Minimum
Deviation

nm

nm

nm

nm

Performance Test for the HP 8168F

Model HP 8168F Tunable Laser Source Report No.
Date
Relative Wavelength Accuracy
Wavelength Wavelength
Deviation
Repetition
Setting
Measured
meas - set value
2

1450.000nm

nm

nm

1460.000nm

nm

nm

1475.000nm

nm

nm

1490.000nm

nm

nm

1500.000nm

nm

nm

1510.000nm

nm

nm

1520.000nm

nm

nm

1530.000nm

nm

nm

1540.000nm

nm

nm

1550.000nm

nm

nm

1560.000nm

nm

nm

1575.000nm

nm

nm 1475 to 1575nm

1580.000nm

nm

nm

1590.000nm

nm

nm 1450 to 1590nm

Page 4 of 14
Maximum
Deviation

Minimum
Deviation

nm

nm

nm

nm

Performance Tests D-59

Performance Test for the HP 8168F

Model HP 8168F Tunable Laser Source Report No.
Date
Relative Wavelength Accuracy
Wavelength Wavelength
Deviation
Repetition
Setting
Measured
meas - set value
3

1450.000nm

nm

nm

1460.000nm

nm

nm

1475.000nm

nm

nm

1490.000nm

nm

nm

1500.000nm

nm

nm

1510.000nm

nm

nm

1520.000nm

nm

nm

1530.000nm

nm

nm

1540.000nm

nm

nm

1550.000nm

nm

nm

1560.000nm

nm

nm

1575.000nm

nm

nm 1475 to 1575nm

1580.000nm

nm

nm

1590.000nm

nm

nm 1450 to 1590nm

D-60 Performance Tests

Page 5 of 14
Maximum
Deviation

Minimum
Deviation

nm

nm

nm

nm

Performance Test for the HP 8168F

Model HP 8168F Tunable Laser Source Report No.
Date
Relative Wavelength Accuracy
Wavelength Wavelength
Deviation
Repetition
Setting
Measured
meas - set value
4

1450.000nm

nm

nm

1460.000nm

nm

nm

1475.000nm

nm

nm

1490.000nm

nm

nm

1500.000nm

nm

nm

1510.000nm

nm

nm

1520.000nm

nm

nm

1530.000nm

nm

nm

1540.000nm

nm

nm

1550.000nm

nm

nm

1560.000nm

nm

nm

1575.000nm

nm

nm 1475 to 1575nm

1580.000nm

nm

nm

1590.000nm

nm

nm 1450 to 1590nm

Page 6 of 14
Maximum
Deviation

Minimum
Deviation

nm

nm

nm

nm

Performance Tests D-61

Performance Test for the HP 8168F

Model HP 8168F Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Relative Wavelength Accuracy

Wavelength
Wavelength
Repetition
Setting
Measured
5

Date

Deviation

Maximum
Deviation

meas - set value

1450.000nm

nm

nm

1460.000nm

nm

nm

1475.000nm

nm

nm

1490.000nm

nm

nm

1500.000nm

nm

nm

1510.000nm

nm

nm

1520.000nm

nm

nm

1530.000nm

nm

nm

1540.000nm

nm

nm

1550.000nm

nm

nm

1560.000nm

nm

nm

1575.000nm

nm

nm

1580.000nm

nm

nm

1590.000nm

nm

nm

Range 1475 to 1575nm

nm

nm

1450 to 1590nm

nm

nm

Largest Maximum Deviation

nm
nm

Relative Wavelength Accuracy

(= Largest Maximum Deviation - Smallest Minimum Deviation)

Specication
0.07nm

nm

Range 1450 to 1590nm

nm

Largest Maximum Deviation

Smallest Minimum Deviation

Relative Wavelength Accuracy

nm

(= Largest Maximum Deviation - Smallest Minimum Deviation)

Specication
0.10nm
Measurement Uncertainty

Minimum
Deviation

1475 to 1575nm

Smallest Minimum Deviation

D-62 Performance Tests

Page 7 of 14

nm

60.01nm

Performance Test for the HP 8168F

Model HP 8168F Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Wavelength Repeatability
Description
1575.000nm

Min Spec

Result
REF

Page 8 of 14

Date
Max Spec

60.002nm

from

nm to REF 1574.965nm

nm 1575.035nm

from

nm to REF 1574.965nm

nm 1575.035nm

from

nm to REF 1574.965nm

nm 1575.035nm

from

nm to REF 1574.965nm

nm 1575.035nm

from

nm to REF 1574.965nm

nm 1575.035nm

Wavelength Repeatability
Description
1590.000nm

Min Spec

Result
REF

Measurement
Uncertainty

Max Spec

Measurement
Uncertainty

60.002nm

from

nm to REF 1594.950nm

nm 1595.050nm

from

nm to REF 1594.950nm

nm 1595.050nm

from

nm to REF 1594.950nm

nm 1595.050nm

from

nm to REF 1594.950nm

nm 1595.050nm

from

nm to REF 1594.950nm

nm 1595.050nm
Performance Tests D-63

Performance Test for the HP 8168F

Model HP 8168F Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Maximum Power Test
Wavelength

Minimum Spec
#007
option:
#023
#003 #023+#003
(circle the appropriate)

Page 9 of 14

Date
Result

1450nm

-7.0dBm -8.0dBm -8.5dBm

-9.5dBm

dBm

1460nm

-7.0dBm -8.0dBm -8.5dBm

-9.5dBm

dBm

1475nm

+1.0dBm 0.0dBm -0.5dBm

-1.5dBm

dBm

1480nm

+1.0dBm 0.0dBm -0.5dBm

-1.5dBm

dBm

1490nm

+1.0dBm 0.0dBm -0.5dBm

-1.5dBm

dBm

1500nm

+1.0dBm 0.0dBm -0.5dBm

-1.5dBm

dBm

1510nm

+1.0dBm 0.0dBm -0.5dBm

-1.5dBm

dBm

1520nm

+7.0dBm +6.0dBm +5.5dBm +4.5dBm

dBm

1530nm

+7.0dBm +6.0dBm +5.5dBm +4.5dBm

dBm

1540nm

+7.0dBm +6.0dBm +5.5dBm +4.5dBm

dBm

1550nm

+7.0dBm +6.0dBm +5.5dBm +4.5dBm

dBm

1560nm

+7.0dBm +6.0dBm +5.5dBm +4.5dBm

dBm

1570nm

+7.0dBm +6.0dBm +5.5dBm +4.5dBm

dBm

1575nm

+1.0dBm 0.0dBm -0.5dBm

-1.5dBm

dBm

1580nm

-7.0dBm -8.0dBm -8.5dBm

-9.5dBm

dBm

1590nm

-7.0dBm -8.0dBm -8.5dBm

-9.5dBm

dBm

D-64 Performance Tests

Measurement
Uncertainty
60.30dB

Performance Test for the HP 8168F

Model HP 8168F Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Power Linearity
(HP 8168F without attenuator)
Power
Setting
at current
setting

start: +1.0dBm

Relative
Power
from
start

REF

Page 10 of 14
Date

Power
Power
Reduction Linearity
at current
setting
+
=
0.0dB
0.00dB

0.0dBm

dB

1.0dB

dB

-1.0dBm

dB

2.0dB

dB

-2.0dBm

dB

3.0dB

dB

-3.0dBm

dB

4.0dB

dB

-4.0dBm

dB

5.0dB

dB

-5.0dBm

dB

6.0dB

dB

-6.0dBm

dB

7.0dB

dB

-7.0dBm

dB

8.0dB

dB

Maximum Power Linearity at current setting

dB

Minimum Power Linearity at current setting

dB

Final Power Linearity

(= Max Power Linearity - Min Power Linearity)
Specication

Measurement Uncertainty

dBpp
0.2dBpp

60.05dB
Performance Tests D-65

Performance Test for the HP 8168F

Model HP 8168F Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Power Linearity
(HP 8168F with attenuator)

Page 11 of 14
Date

Power
Relative
Power
Power
Setting
Power Reduction Linearity
at current
from
at current
setting
start
setting
+
=
start: 0.0dBm
REF dB
0.0dB
0.00 dB

-5.0dBm

dB

5.0dB

dB

-10.0dBm

dB

10.0dB

dB

-15.0dBm

dB

15.0dB

dB

-20.0dBm

dB

20.0dB

dB

-25.0dBm

dB

25.0dB

dB

-30.0dBm

dB

30.0dB

dB

-35.0dBm

dB

35.0dB

dB

-40.0dBm

dB

40.0dB

dB

-47.0dBm

dB

47.0dB

dB

Maximum Power Linearity at current setting

dB

Minimum Power Linearity at current setting

dB

Final Power Linearity

(= Max Power Linearity - Min Power Linearity)
Specication

Measurement Uncertainty
D-66 Performance Tests

dBpp
0.6dBpp

60.05dB

Performance Test for the HP 8168F

Page 12 of 14

Model HP 8168F Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Power Flatness versus Wavelength
Wavelength
Deviation
1475nm

Date

0.00 (start value, REF)

1480nm

dB

1490nm

dB

1500nm

dB

1510nm

dB

1520nm

dB

1530nm

dB

1540nm

dB

1550nm

dB

1560nm

dB

1570nm

dB

1575nm

dB
Maximum deviation

dB

Minimum deviation

dB

Flatness
(= Maximum - Minimum deviation)
dBpp
Specication 0.2dBpp without #003
0.4dBpp with #003

Measurement Uncertainty

60.07dB
Performance Tests D-67

Performance Test for the HP 8168F

Page 13 of 14

Model HP 8168F Tunable Laser Source Report No.

Date
Power Stability
High power
Low power
Maximum deviation

dB

Maximum deviation

dB

Minimum deviation

dB

Minimum deviation

dB

Power Stability
(= Max - Min deviation)
Specication

dBpp
0.06dBpp

Power Stability
(= Max - Min deviation)
Specication

Measurement Uncertainty 60.02dB

D-68 Performance Tests

dBpp
0.06dBpp

Performance Test for the HP 8168F

Model HP 8168F Tunable Laser Source Report No.
Source Spontaneous Emission

Date

Output
Maximum
Power
Spec
#007
#023
#003 #023+#003
(circle the appropriate)

Wavelength

option:

Page 14 of 14
Measurement
Uncertainty

Result

61.20dB

1450nm

-7.0dBm

-8.0dBm -8.5dBm

-9.5dBm

-35dB

dB

1460nm

-7.0dBm

-8.0dBm -8.5dBm

-9.5dBm

-35dB

dB

1475nm

+1.0dBm

0.0dBm -0.5dBm

-1.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1480nm

+1.0dBm

0.0dBm -0.5dBm

-1.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1490nm

+1.0dBm

0.0dBm -0.5dBm

-1.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1500nm

+1.0dBm

0.0dBm -0.5dBm

-1.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1510nm

+1.0dBm

0.0dBm -0.5dBm

-1.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1520nm

+7.0dBm

+6.0dBm +5.5dBm +4.5dBm

-55dB

dB

1530nm

+7.0dBm

+6.0dBm +5.5dBm +4.5dBm

-55dB

dB

1540nm

+7.0dBm

+6.0dBm +5.5dBm +4.5dBm

-55dB

dB

1550nm

+7.0dBm

+6.0dBm +5.5dBm +4.5dBm

-55dB

dB

1560nm

+7.0dBm

+6.0dBm +5.5dBm +4.5dBm

-55dB

dB

1570nm

+7.0dBm

+6.0dBm +5.5dBm +4.5dBm

-55dB

dB

1575nm

+1.0dBm

0.0dBm -0.5dBm

-1.5dBm

-45dB

dB

1580nm

-7.0dBm

-8.0dBm -8.5dBm

-9.5dBm

-35dB

dB

1590nm

-7.0dBm

-8.0dBm -8.5dBm

-9.5dBm

-35dB

dB

Performance Tests D-69

E
Cleaning Procedures
The Cleaning Kit
A full cleaning kit contains the following items:
Isopropyl alcohol This is usually available from pharmaceutical suppliers or chemists.
If possible, use alcohol supplied for medical purposes, rather than impure
alcohol or alcohol with additives.
Caution
Do not use other solvents as some can damage plastic materials and claddings.
For example, Acetone dissolves the adhesives used in ber optic devices.
Warning
Never drink this alcohol as this can lead to blindness or other serious damage
to your health.
Cotton-swabs
Use swabs such as Q-tips or other cotton-swabs. These are typically available
from local distributors of medical or hygiene products (such as supermarkets or
pharmacies).
Note If you are cleaning connector interfaces or adapters, the diameter of the
cotton swab is important. Cotton swabs for babies normally have a smaller
diameter.
Caution
Do not use foam swabs, as these can leave lmy deposits on the surface you
are cleaning.
Store your cotton-swabs carefully and never reuse them. Dust and dirt from
the air or from previous cleaning, can scratch or dirty your optical device.
Soft-tissues
These are available from most stores and distributors of medical and hygiene
products (such as supermarkets or pharmacies).
Use multi-layer tissues made from non-recycled cellulose. These are more
absorbent and softer than other types and they do not scratch the surface of
your device.
Caution
Store your soft-tissues carefully and never reuse them, as dust and dirt from
the air or from previous cleaning can scratch and dirty your optical device.
Cleaning Procedures E-1

Pipe-cleaner

Compressed Air

This is available from tobacco shops.

Ensure that the bristles of the pipe-cleaner are soft, so that they do not scratch
your device during cleaning.
Caution
Store your pipe-cleaners carefully and never reuse them as dust and dirt from
the air or from previous cleaning can scratch and dirty your optical device.
This is available from laboratory suppliers.
It is essential that your compressed air is free of dust, water and oil. Only use
clean, dry air. If you do not, it can lead to lmy deposits or scratches.
When using compressed air from a can,
Hold the can upright. A slant can cause propellant to escape with the
compressed air and dirty your optical device.
Spray the rst couple of seconds into the air, as the rst stream of
compressed air can contain condensation or propellant. Any condensation
produces a lmy deposit.
If you are using compressed air from a can, you should select one with a
CFC-free propellant, for the sake of the environment.

E-2 Cleaning Procedures

Other Cleaning Tools

To examine devices you also require:

Microscope
Select a microscope with a magnication range of between 50X and 300X.
These should be available from photographic stores or laboratory suppliers.
Ensure that the light source of the microscope is exible. This helps you to
examine your device closely and from dierent angles.
A microscope allows you to determine the type of dirt on your device and its
extent. Then you can choose the correct cleaning procedure and later to
examine the results of cleaning. With a microscope you can also determine if
your optical device is scratched.
Ultrasonic bath This is typically available from photographic stores or laboratory suppliers.
An ultrasonic bath very gently removes greasy and other stubborn dirt from
optical devices.
Only use an ultrasonic bath with isopropyl alcohol, as other solvents can
damage or dirty your optical device.
Warm water and Use water only if you are sure that your optical device will not corrode or be
liquid soap
damaged. Do not use hot water, as this can lead to mechanical stress that can
damage your optical device. Ensure that your liquid soap has no abrasive
properties or perfume in it, as these can scratch or damage your optical device.
Do not use normal washing-up liquid, as it can leave behind an iridescent lm.
Premoistened
These are available from HP. The part number is HP 92193N (80 Wipes per
cleaning wipes box). These are tissues that are moistened with isopropyl alcohol.
Polymer lm
This is typically available from professional photographic stores or laboratory
suppliers.
Polymer lm is very gentle on optical surfaces and is particularly good for
cleaning extremely sensitive devices such as mirrors.
Infrared sensor This is typically available from laboratory suppliers.
card
With this card you can qualitatively check the uniformity of your emitted laser
light, because when the laser light is projected onto the sensor card it becomes
visible.
Some lens cleaning papers and cleaning kits available, for example, in
Lens Cleaning
photographic stores are not suitable for cleaning ber optic devices. To be sure,
Paper
please ask the salesperson or the manufacturer.

Cleaning Procedures E-3

Preserving Connectors
Listed below are some hints on how to keep your connectors in the best possible condition.
Making
Before you make any connection you must ensure that all cables and
Connections
connectors are clean. If they are dirty, use the appropriate cleaning procedure.
When inserting the ferrule of a patchcord into a connector or an adapter, make
sure that the ber end does not touch the outside of the mating connector or
adapter. Otherwise you will rub the ber end against an unsuitable surface,
producing scratches and dirt deposits on the surface of your ber.
Dust Caps and
Be careful when replacing dust caps after use. Do not press the bottom of the
cap onto the ber as any dust in the cap can scratch or dirty your ber surface.
Shutter Caps
When you have nished cleaning, put the dust cap back on, or close the
shutter cap if the equipment is not going to be used immediately.
Keep the caps on the equipment always when it is not in use.
All of Hewlett-Packard's lightwave instruments and accessories are shipped
with either laser shutter caps or dust caps. If you need additional or
replacement dust caps, contact your Hewlett-Packard sales oce.
Immersion Oil
Where it is possible, do not use immersion oil or other index matching
and Other Index compounds with your device. They are liable to impair and dirty the surface of
the device. In addition, the characteristics of your device can be changed and
Matching
your measurement results aected.
Compounds

Cleaning Instrument Housings

Use a dry and very soft cotton tissue to clean the instrument housing and the keypad. Do not
open the instruments as there is a danger of electric shock, or electrostatic discharge. Opening the
instrument can cause damage to sensitive components, and in addition your warranty will be
voided.

E-4 Cleaning Procedures

Cleaning Procedures

If you are unsure about the correct cleaning procedure for your device or if you are unsure
whether the procedure given here is suitable for your device, check with the manufacturer or
sales distributor, or try the procedure on a dummy or test device rst.
In general, whenever possible use physically contacting connectors, and dry connections. Fiber
connectors may be used dry or wet. Dry means without index matching compound. If there is a
need to use an index matching compound, use only HP index matching oil (part number
8500-4922). Clean the connectors, interfaces and bushings carefully each time after use.

Warning

Make sure to disable all sources when you are cleaning any
optical interfaces.
Under no circumstances look into the end of an optical
cable attached to the optical output when the device is
operational.
The laser radiation is not visible to the human eye, but it
can seriously damage your eyesight.

Cleaning Cable Connectors

Cleaning connectors is dicult as the core diameter of a singlemode ber is only about 9m. This
generally means you cannot see streaks or scratches on the surface. To be certain of the condition
of the surface of your connector and to check it after cleaning, you need a microscope.
In the case of scratches, or of dust that has been burnt onto the surface of the connector, you may
have no option but to polish the connector. This depends on the degree of dirtiness, or the depth
of the scratches. This is a dicult procedure and should only be performed by skilled personnel,
and as a last resort as it wears out your connector.

Warning

Never look into the end of an optical cable that is connected

to an active source.

Cleaning Procedures E-5

To assess the projection of the emitted light beam you can use an infrared sensor card. Hold the
card approximately 5 cm from the output of the connector. The invisible emitted light is projected
onto the card and becomes visible as a small circular spot.
Preferred
1. Clean the connector by rubbing a new, dry cotton-swab over the surface
using a small circular movement.
Procedure
2. Blow away any remaining lint with compressed air.
Procedure for
Use this procedure particularly when there is greasy dirt on the connector:
Stubborn Dirt
1. Moisten a new cotton-swab with isopropyl alcohol.
2. Clean the connector by rubbing the cotton-swab over the surface using a
small circular movement.
3. Take a new, dry soft-tissue and remove the alcohol, dissolved sediment and
dust, by rubbing gently over the surface using a small circular movement.
4. Blow away any remaining lint with compressed air.
An Alternative The better, more gentle, but more expensive cleaning procedure is to use an
ultrasonic bath with isopropyl alcohol.
Procedure
1. Hold the tip of the connector in the bath for at least three minutes.
2. Take a new, dry soft-tissue and remove the alcohol, dissolved sediment and
dust, by rubbing gently over the surface using a small circular movement.
3. Blow away any remaining lint with compressed air.

Cleaning Connector Adapters

Caution
Some adapters have an anti-re ection coating on the back to reduce back re ection. This coating
is extremely sensitive to solvents and mechanical abrasion. Extra care is needed when cleaning
these adapters.
Preferred
1. Clean the adapter by rubbing a new, dry cotton-swab over the surface using
Procedure
a small circular movement.
2. Blow away any remaining lint with compressed air.
Procedure for
Use this procedure particularly when there is greasy dirt on the adapter:
Stubborn Dirt
1. Moisten a new cotton-swab with isopropyl alcohol.
2. Clean the adapter by rubbing the cotton-swab over the surface using a small
circular movement.
3. Take a new, dry soft-tissue and remove the alcohol, dissolved sediment and
dust, by rubbing gently over the surface using a small circular movement.
4. Blow away any remaining lint with compressed air.

E-6 Cleaning Procedures

Cleaning Connector Interfaces

Caution
Be careful when using pipe-cleaners, as the core and the bristles of the pipe-cleaner are hard
and can damage the interface.
Do not use pipe-cleaners on optical head adapters, as the hard core of normal pipe cleaners can
damage the bottom of an adapter.
Preferred
1. Clean the interface by pushing and pulling a new, dry pipe-cleaner into the
Procedure
opening. Rotate the pipe-cleaner slowly as you do this.
2. Then clean the interface by rubbing a new, dry cotton-swab over the
surface using a small circular movement.
3. Blow away any remaining lint with compressed air.
Procedure for
Use this procedure particularly when there is greasy dirt on the interface:
Stubborn Dirt
1. Moisten a new pipe-cleaner with isopropyl alcohol.
2. Clean the interface by pushing and pulling the pipe-cleaner into the
opening. Rotate the pipe-cleaner slowly as you do this.
3. Moisten a new cotton-swab with isopropyl alcohol.
4. Clean the interface by rubbing the cotton-swab over the surface using a
small circular movement.
5. Using a new, dry pipe-cleaner, and a new, dry cotton-swab remove the
alcohol, any dissolved sediment and dust.
6. Blow away any remaining lint with compressed air.

Cleaning Procedures E-7

Cleaning Bare Fiber Adapters

Bare ber adapters are dicult to clean. Protect from dust unless they are in use.
Caution
Never use any kind of solvent when cleaning a bare ber adapter as
Solvents can damage the foam inside some adapters.
They can deposit dissolved dirt in the groove, which can then dirty the surface of an inserted
ber.
Preferred
Blow away any dust or dirt with compressed air.
Procedure
Procedure for
Use this procedure particularly when there is greasy dirt on the adapter:
Stubborn Dirt
Caution
Be careful when using pipe-cleaners, as the core and the bristles of the
pipe-cleaner are hard and can damage the adapter.
1. Clean the adapter by pushing and pulling a new, dry pipe-cleaner into the
opening. Rotate the pipe-cleaner slowly as you do this.
2. Clean the adapter by rubbing a new, dry cotton-swab over the surface using
a small circular movement.
3. Blow away any remaining lint with compressed air.

Cleaning Bare Fiber Ends

Bare ber ends are often used for splices or, together with other optical components, to create a
parallel beam. The end of a ber can often be scratched. You make a new cleave. To do this:
1. Strip o the cladding.
2. Take a new soft-tissue and moisten it with isopropyl alcohol.
3. Carefully clean the bare ber with this tissue.
4. Make your cleave and immediately insert the ber into your bare ber adapter in order to
protect the surface from dirt.

E-8 Cleaning Procedures

Cleaning Lenses

Some lenses have special coatings that are sensitive to solvents, grease, liquid and mechanical
abrasion. Take extra care when cleaning lenses with these coatings.
Lens assemblies consisting of several lenses are not normally sealed. Therefore, use as little
alcohol as possible, as it can get between the lenses and in doing so can change the properties of
projection.
Preferred
1. Clean the lens by rubbing a new, dry cotton-swab over the surface using a
Procedure
small circular movement.
2. Blow away any remaining lint with compressed air.
Procedure for
Use this procedure particularly when there is greasy dirt on the lens:
Stubborn Dirt
1. Moisten a new cotton-swab with isopropyl alcohol.
2. Clean the lens by rubbing the cotton-swab over the surface using a small
circular movement.
3. Using a new, dry cotton-swab remove the alcohol, any dissolved sediment
and dust.
4. Blow away any remaining lint with compressed air.

Cleaning Procedures E-9

Cleaning Large Area Lenses and Mirrors

Caution
Some mirrors, such as those from a monochromator, are very soft and sensitive. Therefore, never
touch them and do not use cleaning tools such as compressed air or polymer lm.
Some lenses have special coatings that are sensitive to solvents, grease, liquid and mechanical
abrasion. Take extra care when cleaning lenses with these coatings.
Lens assemblies consisting of several lenses are not normally sealed. Therefore, use as little liquid
as possible, as it can get between the lenses and in doing so can change the properties of
projection.
Preferred
1. Blow away any dust or dirt with compressed air.
Procedure
Procedure for
Use this procedure particularly when there is greasy dirt on the lens:
Stubborn Dirt
Caution

Alternative
Procedure A

Alternative
Procedure B

Only use water if you are sure that your device does not corrode.
Do not use hot water as this can lead to mechanical stress, which can
damage your device.
Make sure that your liquid soap has no abrasive properties or perfume in it,
because they can scratch and damage your device.
Do not use normal washing-up liquid as sometimes an iridescent lm remains.
1. Moisten the lens or the mirror with water.
2. Put a little liquid soap on the surface and gently spread the liquid over the
whole area.
3. Wash o the emulsion with water, being careful to remove it all, as any
remaining streaks can impair measurement accuracy.
4. Take a new, dry soft-tissue and remove the water, by rubbing gently over
the surface using a small circular movement.
5. Blow away remaining lint with compressed air.
To clean lenses that are extremely sensitive to mechanical stress or pressure
you can also use an optical clean polymer lm. This procedure is
time-consuming, but you avoid scratching or destroying the surface.
1. Put the lm on the surface and wait at least 30 minutes to make sure that
the lm has had enough time to dry.
2. Remove the lm and any dirt with special adhesive tapes.
If your lens is sensitive to water then:
1. Moisten the lens or the mirror with isopropyl alcohol.
2. Take a new, dry soft-tissue and remove the alcohol, dissolved sediment and
dust, by rubbing gently over the surface using a small circular movement.
3. Blow away remaining lint with compressed air.

E-10 Cleaning Procedures

Cleaning Fixed Connector Interfaces

A few instruments, such as the HP 8158B, have xed connector interfaces. Generally, avoid
cleaning this kind of interface, because it is dicult to remove any used alcohol or lint from the
input of the optical block. Keep the dust caps on the interfaces unless it is in use.
If there is dust on the interface, try cleaning it using compressed air.
If there is uid or greasy dirt on the interface then contact Hewlett-Packard, where trained
personnel can open the instrument and do the cleaning. Never open the instrument to clean the
optical block yourself, because the optical components can be easily scratched or misaligned.

Cleaning Optical Glass Plates

Some instruments, for example, the optical heads from Hewlett-Packard have an optical glass
plate to protect the sensor. Clean this glass plate in the same way as optical lenses (see \Cleaning
Lenses").

Cleaning Physical Contact Interfaces

Remove any connector interfaces from the optical output of the instrument before you start the
cleaning procedure.
Cleaning interfaces is dicult as the core diameter of a singlemode ber is only about 9m. This
generally means you cannot see streaks or scratches on the surface. To be certain of the degree of
pollution on the surface of your interface and to check whether it has been removed after
cleaning, you need a microscope.
Warning
Never look into an optical output, because this can seriously damage your eye sight.
To assess the projection of the emitted light beam you can use an infrared sensor card. Hold the
card approximately 5 cm from the interface. The invisible emitted light is projected onto the card
and becomes visible as a small circular spot.
Preferred
1. Clean the interface by rubbing a new, dry cotton-swab over the surface
using a small circular movement.
Procedure
2. Blow away any remaining lint with compressed air.
Procedure for
Use this procedure particularly when there is greasy dirt on the interface:
Stubborn Dirt
1. Moisten a new cotton-swab with isopropyl alcohol.
2. Clean the interface by rubbing the cotton-swab over the surface using a
small circular movement.
3. Take a new, dry soft-tissue and remove the alcohol, dissolved sediment and
dust, by rubbing gently over the surface using a small circular movement.
4. Blow away any remaining lint with compressed air.
Cleaning Procedures E-11

Cleaning Recessed Lens Interfaces

Preferred
Procedure

Procedure for
Stubborn Dirt

1. Blow away any dust or dirt with compressed air.

If this is not sucient, then
1. Clean the interface by rubbing a new, dry cotton-swab over the surface
using a small circular movement.
2. Blow away any remaining lint with compressed air.
Use this procedure particularly when there is greasy dirt on the interface, and
using the procedure for light dirt is not sucient. Using isopropyl alcohol
should be your last choice for recessed lens interfaces because of the diculty
of cleaning out any dirt that is washed to the edge of the interface:
1. Moisten a new cotton-swab with isopropyl alcohol.
2. Clean the interface by rubbing the cotton-swab over the surface using a
small circular movement.
3. Take a new, dry soft-tissue and remove the alcohol, dissolved sediment and
dust, by rubbing gently over the surface using a small circular movement.
4. Blow away any remaining lint with compressed air.

Cleaning Fragile Optical Devices

Some optical devices, such as the HP 81000BR Reference Re ector, which has a gold plated
surface, are very sensitive to mechanical stress or pressure. Do not use cotton-swabs, soft-tissues
or other mechanical cleaning tools, as these can scratch or destroy the surface.
Preferred
1. Blow away any dust or dirt with compressed air.
Procedure
Procedure for
To clean devices that are extremely sensitive to mechanical stress or pressure
Stubborn Dirt
you can also use an optical clean polymer lm. This procedure is
time-consuming, but you avoid scratching or destroying the surface.
1. Put the lm on the surface and wait at least 30 minutes to make sure that
the lm has had enough time to dry.
2. Remove the lm and any dirt with special adhesive tapes.
Alternative
For these types of optical devices you can often use an ultrasonic bath with
isopropyl alcohol. Only use the ultrasonic bath if you are sure that it won't
Procedure
cause any damage to the device.
1. Put the device into the bath for at least three minutes.
2. Blow away any remaining liquid with compressed air.
If there are any streaks or drying stains on the surface, repeat the cleaning
procedure.

E-12 Cleaning Procedures

Cleaning Metal Filters or Attenuator Gratings

This kind of device is extremely fragile. A misalignment of the grating leads to inaccurate
measurements. Never touch the surface of the metal lter or attenuator grating. Be very careful
when using or cleaning these devices. Do not use cotton-swabs or soft-tissues, as there is the
danger that you cannot remove the lint and that the device will be destroyed by becoming
mechanically distorted.
Preferred
1. Use compressed air at a distance and with low pressure to remove any dust
Procedure
or lint.
Procedure for
Do not use an ultrasonic bath as this can damage your device.
Stubborn Dirt
Use this procedure particularly when there is greasy dirt on the device:
1. Put the optical device into a bath of isopropyl alcohol, and wait at least 10
minutes.
2. Remove the uid using compressed air at some distance and with low
pressure.
If there are any streaks or drying stains on the surface, repeat the whole
cleaning procedure.

Cleaning Procedures E-13

F
Error Messages

Display Messages

AVA is the equivalent of AVAILABLE (see below), if Coherence Control is on or

below Uncal level.
AVAILABLE indicates that the set value is too high for laser output while the
instrument is warming up.
The value given in the message is the maximum power available.
CC UNCAL indicates that the set power value is too small to achieve full
linewidth broadening.
EXC is the equivalent of EXCESSIVE (see below), if Coherence Control is on or
below Uncal level.
EXCESSIVE indicates that the set value is greater than the laser can output at
this wavelength.
The value given in the message (P = ) is the actual power being output, the
maximum power available at that wavelength.
INITIALIZING is displayed while the instrument is performing its internal
initialization.
LASER PROTECTION indicates that the laser has been switched o to prevent
damage to the laser diode.
Try, once or twice, to reenable the laser. If this does not work, try reducing the
power, and then reenabling. If this does not work, press 4AUX5 Realign for
Automatic Realignment. This will automatically realign the laser cavity. See
\Automatic Realignment" in Chapter 3 for more information.
STABILIZING indicates that the laser heat chamber is not at operating
temperature. It can take around 1 hour for the temperature to stabilize.
The percentage value given as part of the message indicates how close the
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Error Messages F-1

instrument is to the operating temperature (100%). (See \Stabilizing" in

Appendix A for more detailed information about stabilizing.)

F-2 Error Messages

HP-IB Messages
Instrument Specic Errors

These are error messages with positive error numbers. They indicate errors such
as incompatible modes.

200 Not Attenuation Mode

This indicates that a command or query was received that cannot be executed
or answered in Power Mode (see \[:SOURce]:POWer:ATTenuation:AUTO" in
Chapter 5).

Command Errors

These are error messages in the range -100 to -199. They indicate that a syntax
error has been detected by the parser in a command, such as incorrect data,
incorrect commands, or misspelled or mistyped commands.
A command error is signaled by the command error bit (bit 5) in the event
status register.
-100 Command error. This indicates that the parser has found a command
error but cannot be more specic.
-101 Invalid character. The command contains an invalid or unrecognized
character.
-102 Syntax error. The command or data could not be recognized.
-103 Invalid separator. The parser was expecting a separator (for example, a
semicolon (;) between commands) but did not nd one.
-104 Data type error. The parser was expecting one data type, but found
another (for example, was expecting a string, but received numeric data).
-105 GET not allowed. A Group Execute Trigger was received within a
program message (see IEEE 488.2, 7.7)
-108 Parameter not allowed. More parameters were received for a command
than were expected.

Error Messages F-3

-109 Missing parameter. Fewer parameters were received than the command
requires.
-110 Command header error. A command header is the mnemonic part of the
command (the part not containing parameter information. This error indicates
that the parser has found an error in the command header but cannot be more
specic.
-111 Header separator error. A character that is not a valid header separator
was encountered.
-112 Program mnemonic too long. The program mnemonic must be 12
characters or shorter.
-113 Undened header. This header is not dened for use with the instrument.
-114 Header sux out of range. The header contained an invalid character.
This message sometimes occurs because the parser is trying to interpret a
non-header as a header.
-120 Numeric data error. This error indicates that the parser has found an
error in numeric data (including nondecimal numeric data) but cannot be more
specic.
-121 Invalid character in number. An invalid character was found in numeric
data (note, this may include and alphabetic character in a decimal data, or a \9"
in octal data).
-123 Exponent too large. The exponent must be less than 32 000.
-124 Too many digits. The mantissa of a decimal number can have a maximum
of 255 digits (leading zeros are not counted).
-128 Numeric data not allowed. Another data type was expected for this
command.
-130 Sux error. The sux is the unit, and the unit multiplier for the data.
This error indicates that the parser has found an error in the sux but cannot
be more specic.
-131 Invalid sux. The sux is incorrect or inappropriate.
-134 Sux too long. A sux can have a maximum of 12 characters.
-138 Sux not allowed. A sux was found where none is allowed.

F-4 Error Messages

-140 Character data error. This error indicates that the parser has found an
error in character data but cannot be more specic.
-141 Invalid character data. The character data is incorrect or inappropriate.
-144 Character data too long. Character data can have a maximum of 12
characters.
-148 Character data not allowed. Character data was found where none is
allowed.
-150 String data error. This error indicates that the parser has found an error
in string data but cannot be more specic.
-151 Invalid string data. The string data is incorrect, (for example, an END
message was received before the terminal quote character).
-158 String data not allowed. String data was found where none is allowed.
-160 Block data error. This error indicates that the parser has found an error
in block data but cannot be more specic.
-161 Invalid block data. The block data is incorrect (for example, an END
message was received before the length was satised).
-168 Block data not allowed. Block data was found where none is allowed.

Error Messages F-5

Execution Errors

These are error messages in the range -200 to -299. They indicate that an
execution error has been detected by the execution control block.
An execution error is signaled by the execution error bit (bit 4) in the event
status register.
-200 Execution error. This indicates that an execution error has occurred but
the control block cannot be more specic.
-201 Invalid while in local. This command is invalid because it con icts with
the conguration under local control.
-202 Settings lost due to rtl. A local setting was lost when the instrument was
changing from remote to local control, or from local to remote control.
-220 Parameter error. This indicates that a parameter error has occurred but
the control block cannot be more specic.
-221 Settings con ict. A valid parameter was received, but could not be used
during execution because of a con ict with the current state of the instrument.
-222 Data out of range. The data, though valid, was outside the range allowed
by the instrument.
-223 Too much data. The block, expression, or string data was too long for the
instrument to handle.
-224 Illegal parameter value. One value from a list of possible values was
expected. The parameter received was not found in the list.
-240 Hardware error. Indicates that a command could not be executed due to
a hardware error but the control block cannot be more specic.
-241 Hardware missing. Indicates that a command could not be executed
because of missing instrument hardware.

F-6 Error Messages

Device-Specic Errors

These are error messages in the range -300 to -399, or between 1 and 32767.
They indicate that an error has been detected that is specic to the operation of
the tunable laser source.
A device-specic error is signaled by the device-specic error bit (bit 3) in the
event status register.
-300 Device-specic error. This indicates that a device-specic error has
occurred. No more specic information is available.
-310 System error. An instrument system error has occurred.
-311 Memory error. A memory error has been detected.
-314 Save/recall memory lost. The nonvolatile data saved by the *SAV
command has been lost.
-315 Conguration memory lost. The nonvolatile conguration data saved by
the instrument has been lost.
-330 Self-test failed. Further information about the self-test failure is available
by using *TST?.
-350 Queue over ow. The error queue has over owed. This error is written to
the last position in the queue, no further errors are recorded.

Error Messages F-7

Query Errors

These are error messages in the range -400 to -499. They indicate that an error
has been detected by the output queue control.
A device-specic error is signaled by the query error bit (bit 2) in the event
status register.
-300 Query error. This indicates that a query error has occurred. No more
specic information is available.
-410 Query INTERRUPTED. A condition occurred that interrupted the
transmission of the response to a query (for example, a query followed by a
DAB or a GET before the response was completely sent).
-420 Query UNTERMINATED. A condition occurred that interrupted the
reception of a query (for example, the instrument was addressed to talk and an
incomplete program message was received).
-430 Query DEADLOCKED. A condition causing a deadlocked query has
occurred (for example, both the input and the output buer are full and the
device cannot continue).
-440 Query UNTERMINATED after indenite response. Two queries were
received in the same message. The error occurs on the second query if the rst
requests an indenite response, and was already executed.

F-8 Error Messages

The Passive Component Test (PACT)

software

Getting Started
What is the Passive Component Test Software?

This software makes it possible for you to use your tunable laser source to
control a system for testing pigtailed or connectorized passive devices (lters,
couplers, and isolators) over wavelength. A typical system consists of a tunable
laser source, a power meter and a printer. This manual describes how to use this
software.
Depending on the conguration of the system you have, you can measure
Insertion loss (single channel power measurement) over wavelength.
Coupling ratio (dual channel power ratio measurement) over wavelength.
Return loss over wavelength.
The system also has a memory card slot, and a printer driver so that you can
make electronic and hardcopy records of your measurements.
The measurement applications, and the use of the memory card and of printers,
are described individually in the following sections.

Starting the Passive Component Test Software

Press 4 5, and then PACT to start the passive component test software.
The main display for the software shows the hardware conguration of the
system, with the HP-IB connections between the instruments and the printer,
and the optical connections to the Device Under Test (DUT).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Aux

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-1

Figure G-1. The Main Screen

Getting Help while Using the System

Press 4 5 to get help.

When you press this key, the rst help information is displayed.
HELP

Figure G-2. A Summary of the Help Hard- and Softkeys

Press

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Search

to get the help topics menu.

Figure G-3. The Help Topics Menu

Choose a topic using " and # , or the Modify Knob. Press Select , or 4
to get the information.
Press Close to close the help topics menu without selecting a topic.
Many of the help texts are longer than one display. You move through the
information using " and # .
NNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNN

G-2 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

ENTER5

Making Loss Measurements

This section describes the steps used to make a loss measurement, and gives
an example of a loss measurement you can make with a minimum of extra
equipment.

Setting Up the Hardware

To make a loss (insertion loss) measurement you will need the following items.
Your tunable laser source with
a connector interface on the optical output.
a HP 8153A Lightwave Multimeter mainframe with
a lightwave multimeter power sensor module in either channel A or
channel B with
a connector interface on the optical input.
a HP-IB cable to connect the source to the multimeter.
Depending on the optical system you are measuring, you will also need
A patchcord to connect the source to the device under test.
A patchcord to connect the device under test to the sensor.
Set up the hardware as shown in the gure below, making sure that all the
connectors are clean.

Figure G-4. Hardware Set-Up for a Loss Measurement

If you are connecting a printer, you may want to do this at the same time. See
\Setting Up the Printer" for details on connecting printers.
The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-3

Making the Loss Measurement

Note

You cannot set the output power from within the passive
component test software. You should set this before starting the
software. See Chapter 2.
If you want to set the power to the maximum level, you may
nd it useful to know that the sweep parameters inside and
outside the passive component test software are the same. This
means that you can set the sweep parameters in the standard
software, and use Pmax->P to set the power level, and then use
these values in the passive component test software.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

To start the loss measurement you should do the following.

1. If it is not already active, activate the passive component test software (Press
4
5, and then PACT . You can also use this key sequence to return to the
Main display from within the passive component test software).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Aux

Figure G-5. A Summary of the Loss Softkeys

2. Press

Measure .

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

G-4 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

3. Scroll through the menu (use the up and down arrow softkeys, or the Modify
Knob), until Loss Ch. A or Loss Ch.B is highlighted, whichever is applicable
(that is, Loss Ch. A if your sensor is in channel A of the multimeter, Loss
Ch. B if it is in channel B).
4. Press Select .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure G-6. The Loss Measurement Display

This is the loss measurement display. From here you set up for and run the loss
measurement.

Setting the Power Meter

Note

The values you set for the power meter apply to all of the
measurements using this channel. They are not set specically
for each measurement.

If you need to set up the power meter for the measurement, press SetPWM .
There are three parameters for the power meter,
AvgTime, this is the averaging time for the measurement,
AutoRange, this sets whether the meter is autoranging or not,
Zero, this sets whether the meter is zeroed before each set of measurements
(that is, a measurement over the complete wavelength sweep, such as a
reference measurement, or a DUT measurement) or not.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Note

The laser active LED is left on even if the sensor is being

zeroed. The laser itself, is switched o while the zeroing is
being carried out.

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-5

Figure G-7. The Set Power Meter Display

You move from one parameter to the next, using " and # , the Modify Knob, or
4
5.
Press Def.All to set all of the parameters to their default values (200ms
averaging time, autoranging on, without zeroing).
Edit a parameter by pressing 4 5 or Edit .
All of these parameters have restricted possible values. You choose between
these values using the <- and the -> keys.
NNNNN

NNNNN

ENTER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

EDIT

NNNNNNNN

Press 4

ENTER5

Press

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Back

or

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Enter

NNNNNNNN

when you have nished editing the parameter.

to return to the loss measurement.

Setting the Sweep

Note

The values you set for the sweep apply to all of the
measurements and to the -Sweep of the tunable laser source.
They are not set specically for each measurement.

There are ve parameters for the wavelength sweep. You access these by
pressing SwpPara .
start, the wavelength with which the sweep begins.
stop, the wavelength at which the sweep ends.
step, the size of the change in wavelength for each step.
dwell, the amount of time spent at the wavelength during each step. The
power meter begins to measure after the dwell time is nished.
cycles, the number of times the sweep is repeated. The results from the
cycles are averaged.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

G-6 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Figure G-8. The Parameters for a Wavelength Sweep

You move from one parameter to the next, using " and # , the Modify Knob, or
4
5. Only three of the parameters can be displayed at a time, you scroll the
other parameters onto the display.
Edit a parameter by pressing 4 5 or by starting to type the new value.
Press 4
5 when you have nished editing the parameter.
Press Done to return to the loss measurement.
NNNNN

NNNNN

ENTER

EDIT

ENTER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Measuring the Reference

Set up the hardware for measuring the reference, making sure that all the
connectors are clean. That is, connect the source to the sensor, through all the
system components, but excluding the Device Under Test.
In the simplest case you can use a universal through adapter with the
appropriate connector interfaces to join the two patchcords.
Press MeasREF to start the reference measurement.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure G-9. Measuring the Reference

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-7

The percentage value at the bottom left of the display indicates the amount of
the measurement that has been completed (this number is useful when you are
averaging over a number of cycles).

Measuring the Device Under Test

Put the Device Under Test (DUT) into the test setup.
Press MeasDUT to measure the DUT.
The percentage value at the bottom left of the display indicates the amount of
the measurement that has been completed (this number is useful when you are
averaging over a number of cycles).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Looking at the Results

You can look at the results of the test, on the display, or print them on a printer.
See \Printing Your Results" for more details on showing the results.
There is a short cut to the Show Display:
After making the measurement, from the Loss Measurement Display, press
Back .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

On the Measurement Display, press !

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Show

Example, Measuring the Characteristic of a Fabry-Perot

Resonator

This example uses the loss measurement to measure the characteristic of a

simple Fabry-Perot resonator. The resonator is created by separating two
connectors in a through-adapter. The measurement is made in the range 1550nm
to 1555nm, with a resolution of 0.025nm. The DUT connectors are Diamond
HMS-10/HP. We will use a HP 81531A Power Sensor.
1. Set up the hardware as shown below, making sure that all the connectors
are clean:

G-8 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Figure G-10. Test Set-Up to Characterize a Fabry-Perot Resonator

a. Connect the tunable laser source to the multimeter with the HP-IB cable.
b. Make sure that the power sensor is installed in the multimeter
mainframe in channel A.
c. Connect both instruments to the electric supply.
d. Switch on both instruments.
Under normal circumstances you should leave the instruments
Note
to warm-up. (The multimeter needs around 20 minutes to
warm-up. The tunable laser displays Stabilizing at the top of
its display until it is warmed-up). Warming up is necessary for
accuracy of the sensor, and the output power of the source.
e. Connect patchcords to the sensor module and to the tunable laser source.
If your tunable laser source has a slanted connector, make sure that
the orange-sleeved (slanted) connector on the ber is connected to the
tunable laser source. You can do this while the instruments are warming
up.
f. Connect the two patchcords together using the through-adapter.
The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-9

2. Set the power to the default value:

a. Press 4
5.
b. Press 4 5.
c. Press Default .
3. Start the passive component test software:
a. Press 4 5.
b. Press PACT .
4. Select the loss application:
a. Press Measure .
b. Scroll through the applications until Loss Ch. A is highlighted. You can
do this with the " and # keys, or with the Modify Knob.
c. Press Select
OUTPUT POWER
EDIT

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Aux

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

5. Set the power meter to default conditions (that is, for a 200ms averaging
time, with autoranging enabled, but no zeroing):
a. Press SetPWM .
b. Press Def.All .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

c. Press Done .
6. Set the sweep parameters for a sweep from 1550nm to 1555nm, with a step
size of 0.025nm:
a. Press SwpPara .
b. Type 1550, and press 4
5.
c. Type 1555, and press 4
5
d. Type 0.025, and press 4
5.
e. Type 0, and press 4
5.
f. Type 1, and press 4
5.
g. Press Done .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER
ENTER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

G-10 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

7. Measure the reference:

a. Make sure that the two connectors are tightly in the through-adapter.
b. Activate the laser.
c. Press MeasREF .
8. Measure the Device Under Test (DUT):
a. Unscrew the two connectors, and pull each of them slightly out of the
through-adapter, so that they are separated by a millimeter or two.
b. Press MeasDUT .
To look at a graph of the wavelength characteristic:
9. Change to the Show function:
a. Press Back .
b. Press !Show .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

10. Look at the graph of the result from A in Watts:

a. Scroll through the available graphs until A / RefA [dB] is highlighted.
b. Press Select .
c. Press Preview .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

11. When you have nished with the preview, press any of the unmarked
softkeys to return to the Show Display.
12. Press Back and then !Meas to return to the Measurement Display.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-11

Making Return Loss Measurements

This section describes how to make a return loss measurement using the HP
81534A Return Loss Module, and gives an example of a return loss measurement
you can make with a minimum of extra equipment.

Note

It is also possible to make this measurement with the software

using an external splitter and a standard sensor module.

Setting Up the Hardware

To make a return loss measurement you will need the following items.
Your tunable laser source with
a connector interface on the optical output.
a HP 8153A Lightwave Multimeter mainframe with
the HP 81534A Return Loss Module in either channel A or channel B with
connector interfaces on the optical input and output.
a HP-IB cable to connect the source to the multimeter.
Depending on the optical system you are measuring, you will also need
a patchcord to connect the laser source to the input of the return loss module,
a patchcord to connect the module to the device under test.

Note

Check the notes in the manual for your return loss module for
extra things you should consider if you are using the pigtail
option.

Set up the hardware as in the gure below, making sure that all the connectors
are clean.

G-12 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Figure G-11.
Hardware Set-Up for a Return Loss Measurement

If you are connecting a printer you may want to do this at the same time. See
\Setting Up the Printer" for details on connecting printers.

Making the Return Loss Measurement

For information on the theory behind this method of measuring the Return Loss,
please refer to the manual with your HP 81534A Return Loss Module. This also
explains the terms used by the Passive Component Test Software.

Note

You cannot set the output power from within the passive
component test software. You should set this before starting the
software. See Chapter 2.
If you want to set the power to the maximum level, you may
nd it useful to know that the sweep parameters inside and
outside the passive component test software are the same. This
means that you can set the sweep parameters in the standard
software, and use Pmax->P to set the power level, and then use
these values in the passive component test software.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

To start the return loss measurement you should do the following.

1. If it is not already active, activate the passive component test software (Press
4
5, and then PACT . You can also use this key sequence to return to the
Main display from within the passive component test software).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Aux

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-13

Figure G-12. A Summary of the Return Loss Softkeys

2. Press Measure .
3. Scroll through the menu (use the up and down arrow softkeys, or the Modify
Knob), until RetLoss Ch. A or RetLoss Ch.B is highlighted, whichever
is applicable (that is, RetLoss Ch. A if your sensor is in channel A of the
multimeter, RetLoss Ch. B if it is in channel B).
4. Press Select .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure G-13. The Return Loss Measurement Display

This is the return loss measurement display. From here you set up for and run
the return loss measurement.
G-14 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

The formula on the display is the one used to calculate the return loss. For
a derivation of this formula, see the manual for the HP 81534A Return Loss
Module.

Setting the Power Meter

Note

The values you set for the power meter apply to all of the
measurements using this channel. They are not set specically
for each measurement.

If you need to set up the power meter for the measurement, press SetPWM .
There are three parameters for the power meter,
AvgTime, this is the averaging time for the measurement,
AutoRange, this sets whether the meter is autoranging or not,
Zero, this sets whether the meter is zeroed before each set of measurements
(that is, a measurement over the complete wavelength sweep, such as a
reference measurement, or a DUT measurement) or not.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Note

The laser active LED is left on even if the sensor is being

zeroed. The laser itself, is switched o while the zeroing is
being carried out.

Figure G-14. The Set Power Meter Display

You move from one parameter to the next, using " and # , the Modify Knob, or
4
5.
Press Def.All to set all of the parameters to their default values (200ms
averaging time, autoranging on, without zeroing).
Edit a parameter by pressing 4 5 or Edit .
NNNNN

NNNNN

ENTER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

EDIT

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-15

All of these parameters have restricted possible values. You choose between
these values using the <- and the -> keys.
NNNNNNNN

Press 4

ENTER5

Press

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Back

or

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Enter

NNNNNNNN

when you have nished editing the parameter.

to return to the loss measurement.

Setting the Sweep

Note
G

The values you set for the sweep apply to all of the
measurements and to the -Sweep of the tunable laser source.
They are not set specically for each measurement.

There are ve parameters for the wavelength sweep. You access these by
pressing SwpPara .
start, the wavelength with which the sweep begins.
stop, the wavelength at which the sweep ends.
step, the size of the change in wavelength for each step.
dwell, the amount of time spent at the wavelength during each step. The
power meter begins to measure after the dwell time is nished.
cycles, the number of times the sweep is repeated. The results from the
cycles are averaged.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure G-15. The Parameters for a Wavelength Sweep

G-16 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

You move from one parameter to the next, using " and # , the Modify Knob, or
4
5. Only three of the parameters can be displayed at a time, you scroll the
other parameters onto the display.
Edit a parameter by pressing 4 5 or by starting to type the new value.
5 when you have nished editing the parameter.
Press 4
Press Done to return to the loss measurement.
NNNNN

NNNNN

ENTER

EDIT

ENTER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Measuring the Reference Re ection

The reference re ection (REF) and the re ection factor for the reference
re ection (RLref) are on the RLSetup display (you may need to press RLSetup
from the return loss measurement display to get to this display).
Set up the hardware for measuring the reference re ection, making sure that
all the connectors are clean. That is, connect the setup, but instead of the DUT
attach an element with a known re ection factor. In the simplest case, this
will be an open connector (which has a re ection factor of 14.6dB), but more
accurate is a HP 81000BR Reference Re ector (which has a re ection factor of
0.1860.1dB).
Set the value of RLref to that for the re ection factor.
Press MeasREF to start the measurement of the reference re ection.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure G-16. Measuring the Reference Re ection

The percentage value at the bottom left of the display indicates the amount of
the measurement that has been completed (this number is useful when you are
averaging over several cycles).

Measuring the Termination Parameter

The termination parameter is measured with the test setup terminated, so that
there are no re ections from the end where the DUT will be attached. This is a
measurement of the optical and the electrical background noise in the setup.
The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-17

Including or Excluding the Termination Parameter. The termination

parameter (TRM) is on the RLSetup display (you may need to press RLSetup
from the return loss measurement display to get to this display). It shows
whether the termination parameter is being used in the calculation or not
(because its value is small, you may want to ignore it, rather than measure it).
If TRM is Meas then the measured value is necessary for the calculation, if it is
Ignore then the value is being ignored.
Press 0 ! TRM to exclude the termination parameter from the calculation.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Press M ! TRM to include the measured termination parameter in the

calculation.
Measuring the Termination Parameter. If you are measuring the termination
parameter, set up the hardware, making sure that all the connectors are clean.
That is, connect the full setup up to the DUT, but terminate the setup just
before the DUT. You can do this by wrapping the ber just before the nal
connector around a pencil or pen four or ve times.
Press MeasTRM to measure the termination parameter.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure G-17. Measuring the Termination Parameter

The percentage value at the bottom left of the display indicates the amount of
the measurement that has been completed (this number is useful when you are
averaging over several cycles).

Measuring the Device Under Test

Put the device under test into the setup.

Press MeasDUT to measure the DUT.
The percentage value at the bottom left of the display indicates the amount of
the measurement that has been completed (this number is useful when you are
averaging over several cycles).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

G-18 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Looking at the Results

You can look at the results of the test, on the display, or print them on a printer.
See \Printing Your Results" for more details on showing the results.
There is a short cut to the Show Display:
After making the measurement, from the Return Loss Measurement Display,
press Back .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

On the Measurement Display, press !

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Show

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-19

Example, Measuring the Return Loss of a Fabry-Perot

Resonator

This example measures the return loss characteristic of a simple Fabry-Perot

resonator. The resonator is created by separating two connectors in a through
adapter.
The measurement is made in the range 1500nm to 1565nm, with a resolution
of 0.25nm. The laser is given half a second to settle before the measurement
is made, and the measurement is made twice to eliminate noise. The DUT
connectors are Diamond HMS-10/HP.
1. Set up the hardware as shown below, making sure that all the connectors
are clean:
Make sure that the slanted connector is connected to the output
Caution
of the return loss module. Failure to do this can damage the
connectors.

Figure G-18. Test Set-Up to Measure the Reference Re ection

a. Connect the tunable laser source to the multimeter with the HP-IB cable.
G-20 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

b. Make sure that the return loss module is installed in the multimeter
mainframe in channel A.
c. Connect both instruments to the electric supply.
d. Switch on both instruments.
Under normal circumstances you should leave the instruments
Note
to warm-up. (The multimeter needs around 20 minutes to
warm-up. The tunable laser displays Stabilizing at the top of
its display until it is warmed-up). Warming up is necessary for
accuracy of the sensor, and the output power of the source.
e. Connect a patchcord from the tunable laser source to the input of the
return loss module. If your tunable laser source has an angled connector,
make sure that the orange-sleeved (slanted) connector on the ber is
connected to the tunable laser source.
f. Connect a patchcord from the output of the return loss module to the HP
81000AM Through Adapter
g. Attach the HP 81000BR Reference Re ector to the other side of the
through adapter.
2. Set the sweep parameters for a sweep from 1500nm to 1565nm, with a step
size of 0.25nm:
5
a. Press 4
b. Press -Sweep .
c. Type 1500, and press 4
5.
d. Type 1565, and press 4
5
e. Type 0.25, and press 4
5.
f. Type 0.5, and press 4
5.
5.
g. Type 2, and press 4
3. Set the power to the maximum value:
a. Press Pmax!P .
4. Start the passive component test software:
a. Press 4 5.
WAVELENGTH

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Aux

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-21

b. Press PACT .
5. Select the return loss application:
a. Press Measure .
b. Scroll through the applications until RetLoss Ch. A is highlighted. You
can do this with the " and # keys, or with the Modify Knob.
c. Press Select
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

6. Set the power meter for default conditions, that is 200ms averaging time,
with autoranging enabled, but no zeroing:
a. Press SetPWM .
b. Press Def.All .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

c. Press Done .
7. Measure the re ection reference:
5.
a. Type 0.18, press 4
b. Make sure that the ber and the re ector are tightly in the through
adapter.
c. Activate the laser.
d. Press RLSetup .
e. Press MeasREF .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

ENTER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

8. Measure the termination parameter:

a. Remove the reference re ector and store it away carefully.
b. Make sure that TRM is set to Meas (press M!TRM if it is not).
c. Wind the ber just in front of the through adapter four or ve times
around the shaft of a pencil.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

G-22 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Figure G-19. Test Setup for Measuring the Termination Parameter

d. Press MeasTRM .
9. Measure the Device Under Test (DUT):
a. Unwind the ber at the through adapter.
b. Attach a terminated ber to the other side of the through adapter (this is
an ordinary patchcord, with the ber after the connector wrapped four
or ve times around the shaft of a pencil).
c. Unscrew the two connectors, and pull each of them slightly out of the
through adapter, so that they are separated by a millimeter or two.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure G-20. Test Setup for Measuring the Fabry-Perot Resonator

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-23

d. Press Done .
e. Press MeasDUT .
To look at a graph of the wavelength characteristic:
10. Change to the Show function:
a. Press Back .
b. Press !Show .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

11. Look at the results:

a. Scroll through the available graphs until RetLossA [dB] is highlighted.
b. Press Select .
c. Press Preview .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

12. When you have nished with the preview, press any of the unmarked
softkeys to return to the Show Display.
13. Press Back and then ->Meas to return to the Measurement Display.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

G-24 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Making Loss Ratio Measurements

This section describes how to make a ratio measurement. The result could also
be crosstalk, coupling ratio, or suppression, according to the the device being
measured. At the end of the section there is a ratio measurement you can make
with an additional wave-division multiplexer.

Setting Up the Hardware

To make a ratio measurement you will need the following items:

Your tunable laser source with
a connector interface on the optical output.
An HP 8153A Lightwave Multimeter mainframe with
a lightwave multimeter power sensor module in both channel A and
channel B with
a connector interface on the optical input of each.
An HP-IB cable to connect the source to the multimeter.
Depending on the optical system you are measuring, you will also need
A patchcord to connect the source to the device under test.
Patchcords to connect the device under test to the sensors.
Set up the hardware as shown in the gure below, making sure that all the
connectors are clean.

Figure G-21.
Hardware Setup for a Loss Ratio Measurement

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-25

If you are connecting a printer, you may want to do this at the same time. See
\Setting Up the Printer" for details on connecting printers.

Making the Loss Ratio Measurement

Note

You cannot set the output power from within the passive
component test software. You should set this before starting the
software. See Chapter 2.
If you want to set the power to the maximum level, you may
nd it useful to know that the sweep parameters inside and
outside the passive component test software are the same. This
means that you can set the sweep parameters in the standard
software, and use Pmax->P to set the power level, and then use
these values in the passive component test software.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

To start the ratio measurement you should do the following.

1. If it is not already active, activate the passive component test software (Press
4
5, and then PACT . You can also use this key sequence to return to the
Main display from within the passive component test software).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Aux

G-26 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Figure G-22. A Summary of the Loss Ratio Softkeys

2. Press Measure .
3. Scroll through the menu (use the up and down arrow softkeys, or the Modify
Knob), until Loss Ch. A&B is highlighted.
4. Press Select .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure G-23. The Loss Ratio Measurement Display

This is the ratio measurement display. From here you set up for and run the
ratio measurement.

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-27

Setting the Power Meter

Note

The values you set for the power meter apply to all of the
measurements using this channel. They are not set specically
for each measurement.

If you need to set up the power meter for the measurement, press SetPWM .
There are three parameters for the power meter,
AvgTime, this is the averaging time for the measurement,
AutoRange, this sets whether the meter is autoranging or not,
Zero, this sets whether the meter is zeroed before each set of measurements
(that is, a measurement over the complete wavelength sweep, such as a
reference measurement, or a DUT measurement) or not.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Note

The laser active LED is left on even if the sensor is being

zeroed. The laser itself, is switched o while the zeroing is
being carried out.

Figure G-24. The Set Power Meter Display

You move from one parameter to the next, using " and # , the Modify Knob, or
4
5.
Press Def.All to set all of the parameters to their default values (200ms
averaging time, autoranging on, without zeroing).
Edit a parameter by pressing 4 5 or Edit .
All of these parameters have restricted possible values. You choose between
these values using the <- and the -> keys.
NNNNN

NNNNN

ENTER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

EDIT

NNNNNNNN

Press 4

ENTER5

or

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Enter

NNNNNNNN

when you have nished editing the parameter.

G-28 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Press

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Back

to return to the loss measurement.

Setting the Sweep

Note

The values you set for the sweep apply to all of the
measurements and to the -Sweep of the tunable laser source.
They are not set specically for each measurement.

There are ve parameters for the wavelength sweep. You access these by
pressing SwpPara .
start, the wavelength with which the sweep begins.
stop, the wavelength at which the sweep ends.
step, the size of the change in wavelength for each step.
dwell, the amount of time spent at the wavelength during each step. The
power meter begins to measure after the dwell time is nished.
cycles, the number of times the sweep is repeated. The results from the
cycles are averaged.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure G-25. The Parameters for a Wavelength Sweep

You move from one parameter to the next, using " and # , the Modify Knob, or
4
5. Only three of the parameters can be displayed at a time, you scroll the
other parameters onto the display.
NNNNN

NNNNN

ENTER

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-29

Edit a parameter by pressing 4 5 or by starting to type the new value.

Press 4
5 when you have nished editing the parameter.
Press Done to return to the loss measurement.
EDIT

ENTER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Measuring the Reference

Set up the hardware for measuring the reference, making sure that all the
connectors are clean. That is, connect the source to the sensors, through all the
system components, but excluding the the Device Under Test.
In the simplest case you can use a universal through adapter with the
appropriate connector interfaces to join the two patchcords.
Press MeasREF to start the reference measurement.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure G-26. Measuring the Reference

The percentage value at the bottom left of the display indicates the amount of
the measurement that has been completed (this number is useful when you are
averaging over several cycles).
If the device under test is a coupler, and you have problems measuring the
reference for both channels simultaneously, you can measure the reference for
each channel separately (using MeasREF under Loss Ch. A, and then under
Loss Ch. B).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Measuring the Device Under Test

Put the Device Under Test (DUT) into the system under test.
Press MeasDUT to measure the DUT.
The percentage value at the bottom left of the display indicates the amount of
the measurement that has been completed (this number is useful when you are
averaging over several cycles).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

G-30 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Looking at the Results

You can look at the results of the test, on the display, or print them on a printer.
See \Printing Your Results" for more details on showing the results.
There is a short cut to the Show Display:
After making the measurement, from the Loss Ratio Measurement Display,
press Back .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

On the Measurement Display, press !

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Show

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-31

Example, Measuring the Characteristic of a Wavelength

Division Multiplexer

This example uses the ratio measurement to measure the characteristic of a

wavelength division multiplexer. The measurement is made made in the range
1500nm to 1565nm, with a resolution of 0.025nm. The DUT input connector is
Diamond HMS-10/HP, the output connectors are PC. We will use two HP 81531A
Power Sensors.
1. Set up the hardware as shown below, making sure that all the connectors are
clean:
If you have a slanted connector on your tunable laser source,
Caution
make sure that the slanted connector on the ber is connected
to the tunable laser source. Failure to do this can damage the
laser source.

Figure G-27. Test Setup to Measure the Reference for Channel A

a. Connect the tunable laser source to the multimeter with the HP-IB cable.
b. Make sure that the power sensors are installed in the multimeter
mainframe.
G-32 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

c. Connect both instruments to the electric supply.

d. Switch on both instruments.
Under normal circumstances you should leave the instruments
Note
to warm-up. (The multimeter needs around 20 minutes to
warm-up. The tunable laser displays Stabilizing at the top of
its display until it is warmed-up). Warming up is necessary for
accuracy of the sensor, and the output power of the source.
e. Connect a patchcord from the tunable laser source to the input of the
sensor in channel A. If your tunable laser source has a slanted connector,
make sure that the orange-sleeved (slanted) connector on the ber
is connected to the tunable laser source. You can do this while the
instruments are warming up.
2. Set the power to the default value:
5.
a. Press 4
b. Press 4 5.
c. Press Default .
3. Start the passive component test software:
a. Press 4 5.
b. Press PACT .
4. Select the loss A&B application:
a. Press Measure .
b. Scroll through the applications until Loss Ch. A&B is highlighted. You can
do this with the " and # keys, or with the Modify Knob.
c. Press Select
OUTPUT POWER
EDIT

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Aux

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

5. Set the power meter to default conditions (that is, for a 200ms averaging
time, with autoranging enabled, but no zeroing):
a. Press SetPWM .
b. Press Def.All .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-33

c. Press Done .
6. Set the sweep parameters for a sweep from 1500nm to 1565nm, with a step
size of 0.25nm:
a. Press SwpPara .
b. Type 1550, and press 4
5.
c. Type 1555, and press 4
5
d. Type 0.25, and press 4
5.
e. Type 0, and press 4
5.
f. Type 1, and press 4
5.
g. Press Done .
7. Measure the reference for channel A:
a. Press Back
b. Scroll through the applications until Loss Ch. A is highlighted. You can do
this with the " and # keys, or with the Modify Knob.
c. Press Select
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

ENTER

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

d. Activate the laser.

e. Press MeasREF .
8. Measure the reference for channel B:
a. Disconnect the patchcord from the input of channel A, and connect it to
the input of channel B.
b. Press Back
c. Scroll through the applications until Loss Ch. B is highlighted. You can do
this with the " and # keys, or with the Modify Knob.
d. Press Select
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

e. Press MeasREF .
9. Measure the Device Under Test (DUT):
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

G-34 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

a. Connect the DUT into the setup as shown in the gure below:

G
Figure G-28.
Test Setup to Characterize a Wavelength Division Multiplexer

i. Disconnect the patchcord from the input of channel B and connect it

to an HP 81000AM Through Adapter.
ii. Connect one channel of the Wavelength Division Multiplexer (WDM) to
the other side of the through adapter.
iii. Connect one output of the WDM to the input of the sensor in channel
A.
iv. Connect one output of the WDM to the input of the sensor in channel
B.
b. Press Back
c. Scroll through the applications until Loss Ch. A&B is highlighted. You can
do this with the " and # keys, or with the Modify Knob.
d. Press Select
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

e. Press

MeasDUT .

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-35

Printing Your Results

This section describes how to preview your results on the display, and how to
print them on a printer.
You enter the show functions by pressing Show from the Main display, or by
pressing !Show from the Measure display.
The menu shows the full range of results that can be displayed. If you do not
intend to print a result now (if you just want to set up your printer) press
Select . Otherwise, see \Selecting the Result to Show" for more details on
choosing the correct result to print. This brings you to the Show display
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure G-29. The Show Display

G-36 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Figure G-30. A Summary of the Show Softkeys

Setting Up the Printer

Setting Up the Hardware

To print out results you will need the following items:

Your tunable laser source.
A ThinkJet, LaserJet, DeskJet, or PaintJet printer, with either
a HP-IB cable to connect the source to the printer, if your printer has a
HP-IB Connector,
or
a HP-IB cable to connect the source to a interface converter,
The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-37

an interface converter (to convert to Centronics from HP-IB), and

a Centronics printer cable to connect the interface converter to the printer.
Connect the source to the interface converter (if this is necessary), and connect
this to the printer.

Figure G-31. Printer Hardware Setup

Make sure that the HP-IB address for the printer is set to 1.

Setting Up the Printer in Software

To setup your printer, you must start the show functions, and then use the
Setting functions.
From the Show display, press Setting .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure G-32. The Show Setting Display

G-38 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

This is the Show Setting display. From here you set up for printing.
Selecting the Printer. From the Show Setting display
1. Press Printer .
2. Scroll through the menu (use the up and down arrow softkeys, or the Modify
Knob), until your printer is highlighted.
3. Press Select .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Setting the Layout of the Printout

There are eight elements in the printout.

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-39

Figure G-33. The Layout of the Printout

You can set the x- and y-scale of the result yourself, or you can let the
software set it automatically (Autoscale). You can select whether the y-scale is
logarithmic (dBm and dB) or linear(W and %).
The result is always printed, but the other elements are optional.
There are also four user denable pieces of text on the printout.
To switch an element on or o, to enable or disable autoscaling, or to select
linear or log scaling, from the Show Setting display
G-40 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

1. Press Layout .
2. Scroll through the elements (use the up and down arrow softkeys, or the
Modify Knob), until the element you want to switch is highlighted.
3. Press Edit .
4. Toggle the value with <- or -> .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNN

5. Press

NNNNNNNN

Enter .

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Setting the X- or Y-Axis Scaling

If you want the x- or y-axis scaling to be done automatically, set Autoscale X

or Autoscale Y to ON in the layout (see \Setting the Layout of the Printout",
above).
Otherwise, from the Show Setting display
1. Press Scaling .
2. Make sure that the corresponding Autoscale X or Autoscale Y is set to
OFF. This is displayed at the left of the display. You change the values in the
layout (see \Setting the Layout of the Printout", above).
There is one set of x-axis scaling parameters, and three sets of y-axis scaling
parameters, one for each type of unit (Watts, dB/dBm, and %).
Each set has a lower limit (X0, or Y0) and an upper limit (X1, or Y1).
To edit a limit,
3. Scroll through the limits (use the up and down arrow softkeys, or the Modify
Knob), until the limit you want to edit is highlighted.
4. Press 4 5.
5. Edit the value.
6. Press 4 5.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Edit

Enter

Editing Text for a Result

To add or edit the text for a result

1. Press Text from the Show display.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-41

2. Scroll through the menu (use the up and down arrow softkeys, or the Modify
Knob), until the piece of text you want to edit is highlighted.
3. Press Edit .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure G-34. The Edit Text Display

The text is shown on the second line from the bottom of the display, and the
available characters are shown on the bottom line of the display.
To Replace Text.
1. Press More , if necessary, to get to the second set of softkeys (with Insert ,
and so on), then
2. Press Clear .
Then begin entering the new text.
To Change the Cursor Position in the Text.
1. Press More , if necessary, to get to the rst set of softkeys (with Select , and
so on), then
2. Press " , if necessary, so that the prompt > at the left of the text is
highlighted.
3. Move the cursor within the text with the Modify knob, or with 4 5 or 4!5.
To Change between Overwriting and Inserting.
1. Press More , if necessary, to get to the second set of softkeys (with Insert ,
and so on), then
2. Press Insert .
When inserting is active insert is shown at the top right of the display.
Characters are inserted at the cursor position, and the existing text, and the
cursor, is shifted to the right.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

G-42 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

When overwrite is active overwr is shown at the top right of the display. The
character at the cursor position is overwritten and the the cursor is shifted to
the right.
To Put Characters into the Text.
1. Press More , if necessary, to get to the rst set of softkeys (with Select , and
so on), then
2. Press # , if necessary, so that the prompt > at the left of the available
characters is highlighted.
3. Highlight the character you want to put into the text with the Modify knob,
or with 4 5 or 4!5.
a. If you need to change to or from upper case characters, or if you need to
change to or from the numerals, press Shift .
4. Press Select to put the highlighted character into the text at the cursor
position.
To End the Edit.
1. Press More , if necessary, to get to the second set of softkeys (with Insert ,
and so on), then
2. Press Done .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Showing the Results

Enter the show function by pressing
!Show from the Measure display.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Show

from the Main display, or by pressing

Figure G-35. The Show Menu

Selecting the Result to Show

Three types of measurement data is stored for each channel. These are the DUT
measurement, the reference measurement, and the termination measurement.
The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-43

The results that can be displayed are prepared from these sets of measurement
data. Either
individually: in which case A is the DUT measurement, RefA is the reference
measurement, and TermA is the termination measurement for channel A, and
similarly for B;
combined from a single channel: for example A / RefA is the ratio of the DUT
measurement to the reference, RetLossA is the return loss prepared from the
DUT, reference and termination measurements, and so on; or
combined from both channels: here A / B is the ratio of channel A to channel
B, A/B / RefA/B is the ratio of channel A to channel B with respect to
references taken for those channels, and so on.

Note

Selecting the unit in which the result will be prepared is done in

the Setting Layout.

A result is prepared when you select and preview, print, or save. This prepared
result is stored in a separate location from the measurement data. You can print
or preview this result (without preparing) by selecting Last Result
To select a result,
1. Scroll through the results (use the up and down arrow softkeys, or the
Modify Knob), until the one you want to show is highlighted.
2. Press Select .
Selecting Non-Standard Other Results. If you want to prepare results other
than those oered on this menu, you can save the sets of measurements to the
memory card, and then load them into dierent positions in the tunable laser
source.
See \Example, Moving Termination Data to the DUT Data Area", for an example
moving the termination data to the DUT data area using the memory card.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Previewing the Results on the Display

Press Preview to show the result on the display.
The result is shown with the scaling set by the Layout and Scaling displays.
Press any of the unmarked softkeys to return to the Show display.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

G-44 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Making Readings from the Results. When you preview a result, it is shown
with either one or two markers.
Making an Absolute Reading When the result is shown with one marker (which
is also indicated by the label absolute at the left of the display), the absolute
values for the wavelength at which the marker is positioned, and the power at
this position are shown to the left of the result.

Figure G-36. Making an Absolute Reading

To make an absolute reading

1. Make sure that you have the absolute result on the display (Press !abs if
you have the relative result).
2. Use the Modify knob, 4 5, and 4!5 to position the marker on the result.
You can now read the wavelength and the power to the left of the result.
Making a Relative Reading When the result is shown with two markers (which
is also indicated by the label relative at the left of the display), the values for
the dierence in wavelength and power between the markers, are shown to the
left of the display.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-45

Figure G-37. Making a Relative Reading

To make a relative reading

1. Make sure that you have the absolute result on the display (Press !abs if
you have the relative result).
2. Use the Modify knob, 4 5, and 4!5 to position the marker at the reference
position on the result.
3. Press !rel .
4. Use the Modify knob, 4 5, and 4!5 to position the second marker at the
relative position on the result.
You can now read the wavelength dierence between the markers, together
with the power dierence between these wavelengths to the left of the result.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Printing the Results

From the Show display, press Print .
If you have problems with getting the printout, or with the printout form:
Check that the correct printer is selected (Show: Setting, Printer ).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Check that the layout is what you want (Show: Setting,

Scaling ).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Layout , and

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Edit the text if necessary (Show, Text ).

If the markers are not correctly positioned, position them on the Preview
(Show, Preview ).
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

G-46 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Example, Printing Results of Loss against Wavelength

This example sets up the printer and result, and then prints a result with a
measure of the power dierence between 1500nm and 1520nm.
The results are for a loss measurement made in the range 1470 to 1570nm,
measured at a resolution of 0.250nm.
The printer is a DeskJet 550C.
1. Set up the hardware as shown below:
G

Figure G-38. Set-Up to Print Out

a. Connect the tunable laser source to the interface converter with the
HP-IB cable. The interface must have the address 1 (see the manual you
got with the interface for information on checking and changing the
address if this is necessary).
b. Connect the connector interface to the printer with the Centronics cable.
c. Connect the tunable laser source, the connector interface, and the
printer to the electric supply. If you are a non-US user, the connector
interface is powered from an AC-adapter.
d. Switch on the source, interface and printer.
2. Start the passive component test software:
a. Press 4 5.
b. Press PACT .
3. Select the loss result for channel A:
a. Press Show .
Aux

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-47

b. Scroll through the results until A / RefA is highlighted. You can do this
with the " and # keys, or with the Modify Knob.
c. Press Select
NNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

4. Set the printer type:

a. Press Setting .
b. Press Printer .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

c. Scroll through the printers until DeskJet 550 C is highlighted. You can
do this with the " and # keys, or with the Modify Knob.
d. Press Select .
NNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

5. Set the Layout of the Results

a. Press Layout .
b. Scroll through the parameters with the " and # keys, or with the
Modify Knob.
If any of the parameters are set to OFF
i. Scroll through the parameters until the parameter that is OFF is
highlighted.
ii. Press Edit .
iii. Press <- , or -> to turn the parameter ON.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNN

iv. Press Enter

If Unit is set to LIN
i. Scroll through the parameters until Unit is highlighted.
ii. Press Edit .
iii. Press <- , or -> to turn it to LOG.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNN

iv. Press Enter

When all the parameters are ON, and Unit is set to LOG:
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

G-48 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

c. Press
d. Press

Done .

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Done .

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

6. Set the position of the markers on the preview:

a. Press Preview
b. If the result is labelled relative (at the left of the display), press
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

!absolute

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

c. Move the marker to 1500.000nm using the Modify knob, the

! keys.
d. Press !rel .

NNNNNNN

NNNNNNN

and the

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

e. Move the marker to 20.000nm using the Modify knob, the and the !
keys.
f. Press any of the unmarked softkeys.
7. Add a header labelling this as the \Operating Example".
a. Press Text
b. Scroll through the pieces of text until Header is highlighted.
c. Press Edit .
d. Press More , then Clear , then More again.
NNNNNNN

NNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

e. Scroll through the available characters until O is highlighted.

f. Press Select .
g. Press Shift
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

h. Highlight and select the characters \p" \e" \r" \a" \t" \i" \n" \g" in
turn. Then the space character [between z and (].
i. Press Shift
j. Highlight and select the character \H".
k. Press Shift
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-49

l. Highlight and select the characters \x" \a" \m" \p" \l" \e" in turn.
m. Press More and then Done .
8. Label the x-axis \Wavelength (nm)"
a. Press # .
b. Press Edit .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

c. Press More , then Clear , then More again.

d. Highlight and select the characters \W" \a" \v" \e" \l" \e" \n" \g" \t"
\h" \(" \n" \m" \)" in turn.
e. Press More and then Done .
9. Label the y-axis \Power" (the units are automatically labelled).
10. Leave text editing.
a. Press Done .
11. Print the result.
a. Press Print
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

G-50 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Saving Your Results

This section describes the saving and loading of measurements and results to
and from memory cards.
You enter the memory functions by pressing Memory from the Main display.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure G-39. The Memory Display

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-51

Figure G-40. A Summary of the Memory Softkeys

Formatting a Memory Card

The memory card drive formats cards for the DOS FAT-based le system, that is,
the normal DOS format.
To format a card:
1. Make sure that there is no data on the card that you need to keep.
Formatting a card destroys all the data that is on it.
2. From the Memory display, press Format .
3. You are asked Are you sure ???, and if you are sure, press OK to format the
card.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNN

G-52 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Saving a Measurement or Result

Selecting the Measurement or Result to Save

For each channel of the multimeter, three types of measurement data that can
be saved. These are:
MeasDUT is the DUT measurement,
MeasREF is the reference measurement, and
MeasTRM is the termination measurement.
The channel is given after the data type. That is, MeasDUT A is the DUT
measurement for channel A.
You can also save result data, which is prepared from the measurement data.
Either
individually: here A is the DUT measurement, RefA is the reference
measurement, TermA is the termination measurement, and similarly for B;
combined for a single channel: here A / RefA is the ratio of the DUT
measurement to the reference, RetLossA is the return loss prepared from the
DUT, reference and termination measurements, and so on;
combined for both channels: here A / B is the ratio of channel A to channel
B, A/B / RefA/RefB is the ratio of channel A to channel B with respect to
references taken for those channels, and so on.
The units for the result are set under Show Setting Layout.
The result is calculated when you preview, print, or save. This calculated result
is stored in a separate location from the measurement data until the next result
is calculated. You can save the most recently calculated result by selecting Last
Result.
One reason to save such a result, is to use it for processing on another computer.
See \Using Data on a PC" for information on how to convert the result le to
.SLK format for use with spreadsheets and other programs.
To select measurement or result data to save, from the Memory display
1. Press Save .
2. Scroll through the measurements and results (use the up and down arrow
softkeys, or the Modify Knob), until the one you want to save is highlighted.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-53

3. Press

Select .

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Figure G-41. The MemSave Display

Saving the Measurement or Result

G

Once you have selected the measurement or result data, press

to an automatically generated lename.

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Save

to save it

Saving to Your Own Filename

To change or edit the name of a le press

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Save as

from the MemSave display.

Figure G-42. The Show Text Display

The lename is shown on the second line from the bottom of the display, and
the available characters are shown on the bottom line of the display.
To Replace a Filename.
1. Press More , if necessary, to get to the second set of softkeys (with Insert ,
and so on), then
2. Press Clear .
Then begin entering the new lename.
To Change the Cursor Position in the Filename.
1. Press More , if necessary, to get to the rst set of softkeys (with Select , and
so on), then
2. Press " , if necessary, so that the prompt > at the left of the lename is
highlighted.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

G-54 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

3. Move the cursor within the lename with the Modify knob, or with 4 5 or
4!5.
To Change between Overwriting and Inserting.
1. Press More , if necessary, to get to the second set of softkeys (with Insert ,
and so on), then
2. Press Insert .
When inserting is active insert is shown at the top right of the display.
Characters are inserted at the cursor position, and the existing lename text,
and the cursor, is shifted to the right. A lename can have a maximum of
eight characters. If you insert characters into a lename that already has eight
characters, the last character is deleted.
When overwrite is active overwr is shown at the top right of the display. The
character at the cursor position is overwritten and the the cursor is shifted to
the right.
To Put Characters into the Filename.
1. Press More , if necessary, to get to the rst set of softkeys (with Select , and
so on), then
2. Press # , if necessary, so that the prompt > at the left of the available
characters is highlighted.
3. Highlight the character you want to put into the lename with the Modify
knob, or with 4 5 or 4!5.
a. If you need to change to or from upper case characters, or if you need to
change to or from the numerals, press Shift .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Note

Lower case characters are converted to upper case in the

lename on the card.

4. Press Select to put the highlighted character into the lename at the cursor
position.
To End the Edit and Save the Measurement or Result.
1. Press More , if necessary, to get to the second set of softkeys (with Insert ,
and so on), then
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-55

2. Press
3. Press

Done .

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Save .

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Loading a Measurement or Result

There are two types of data that can be saved on the memory card,
measurement data, and result data.
Measurement data les have the endings .DUT, .REF, and .TRM for device
under test, reference, and termination measurements respectively.
Result data les have the ending .RES.
There are seven areas in the tunable laser source where data can be stored.
Any measurement data le can be stored in any of the measurement data
areas. There are three of these for each channel. These are:
MeasDUT for the DUT measurement,
MeasREF for the reference measurement, and
MeasTRM for the termination measurement.
The channel is given after the measurement data type.
Result data can only be stored in the area for results.
To load a Measurement or Result, from the Memory display
1. Press Load .
2. Scroll through the les (use the up and down arrow softkeys, or the Modify
Knob), until the one you want to load is highlighted.
If you are not sure of the contents of a le, you can check it by pressing
Preview .
3. Press Select .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

4. Scroll through the areas where you can store data until the one you want to
load to is highlighted. (Remember, result data can only be stored in Result,
measurement data can be stored in MeasDUT, MeasREF, or MeasTRM).
5. Press Load .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

G-56 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Deleting a File

To delete a le, from the Memory display

1. Press Delete .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

2. Scroll through the les (use the up and down arrow softkeys, or the Modify
Knob), until the one you want to delete is highlighted
3. Press Delete
4. You are asked Are you sure ???, and if you are sure, press OK to delete the
le.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNN

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-57

Example, Moving Termination Data to the DUT Data Area

This example saves the data from the termination measurement for channel A
to the card, loads it into the DUT data area, and then deletes the data on the
card.
It is assumed that a full return loss measurement has been made on the system
(that is, that there a termination has been measured), and that a memory card is
in the card reader.
1. Start the passive component test software:
a. Press 4 5.
b. Press PACT .
2. Press Memory to select the memory functions.
Aux

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

3. Select the termination data for channel A to save:

a. Press Save .
b. Scroll through the data types until MeasTRM A is highlighted. You can do
this with the " and # keys, or with the Modify Knob.
c. Press Select .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

4. Change the lename to \TEMP":

a. Press Save as .
b. Press More , then Clear , and then
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

c. Move the cursor to T with the

Press Select
d. Select E, M, and P similarly.
e. Press More , and then Done .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

More

again.

and ! keys, or with the Modify Knob.

NNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

5. Press Save to save the le, and Back to leave the save function.
6. Load the le into the DUT data area.
a. Press Load .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

G-58 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

b. Press Select .
c. Scroll through the data areas until MeasDUT A is highlighted. You can do
this with the " and # keys, or with the Modify Knob.
d. Press Load .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

e. Press Back to leave the load function.

7. Delete the le from the card.
a. Press Delete .
b. Press Delete .
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

c. Press
d. Press

OK .

NNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Back

to leave the delete function.

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-59

Using Data on a PC

This section covers using result and measurement data on your PC, for example,
in an application such as a spreadsheet.
The data produced by the passive component test software is in binary format
(the format of this data is described in \The Result and Measurement Data
Format"). You received a disk with your passive component test system that
contains simple programs to convert these binary data les into .SLK format
R 1-2-3
R , and Microsoft
R
for use with spreadsheet applications such as Lotus
Excel.
There are two directories
\PACTCONV.HP, which includes the program, and source les for use with a
Hewlett-Packard HP 82335x interface card.
The card must be installed with the Interface Select Code set to 7, and the
information must appear in the corresponding line in your CONFIG.SYS le,
DEVICE= ~EMM386 . . . X=DC00-DFFF
\PACTCONV.NTL that includes the program, and source les for use with a
R NI-488.2 card.
National Instruments
The NI-488.2 card must be installed with the following settings
GPIB-PC Mode: GPIB-PCIIA
Controller
7210 if you use the standard controller
Mode:
9914 if you use the TI controller TI9914A
I/O Address: 2E1:
A6=on, A7=on
Interrupt
IRQ7:
A3=A4=A5=o
Settings:
Jumper set
DMA Level: 1
DRQ1 + DACK1
Jumper set
The programs are intended only to be examples, and are only valid for the
dened congurations mentioned above, and for use with the HP 8167B and HP
8168D/E/F Tunable Laser Sources.
The source code is provided so that you can write your own applications. The
G-60 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

source code is protected by copyright, however Hewlett-Packard permits you to

use and modify it without requiring a license fee, as long as it is only used with
Hewlett-Packard test equipment.
There are two ways of converting with this program.

If the Data is Already On Your PC

. ..

Use

PACTCONV source le name [destination le name]

to convert the data le, where

source le name is the full name of the data le you want to convert,
including the le extension (.DUT, .REF, .TRM, or .RES).
[destination le name] is an optional destination le name.
If you give no value for this, the converted data is saved as source le name
with the le extension .SLK.
This le always has the extension .SLK

Note

You can specify pathnames as part of the source and destination

lenames, but they must be on the same drive as the
PACTCONV program.

For example, to convert the MEAS_001.DUT le into a .SLK le

1. Type PACTCONV MEAS_001.DUT at the cursor, and press 4 5.
This produces the le MEAS_001.SLK.
Enter

If the Data is On the Memory Card in your Tunable Laser Source

Note

...

You should not attempt to use the PACTCONV program while

the tunable laser source is running a measurement.

Use

PACTCONV -p source le number [destination le name] [-h HP-IB Address]

to transfer and convert the data le, where
source le number is the index number of the data le on the memory card
that you want to convert.
The index number is shown to the left of the le name when you list the les
The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-61

on the memory card (Press 4 5, PACT , Memory , Load to get this list; Press
Back and Main when you have nished).
[destination le name] is an optional destination le name.
If you give no value for this, the converted data is saved as source le name
with the le extension .SLK.
This le always has the extension .SLK
HP-IB Address is the HP-IB address of your tunable laser source.
If you do not specify a HP-IB address, the default address (24) is assumed.
NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Aux

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

Note

NNNNNNNNNNNNNN

You can specify pathnames as part of the destination lename,

but it must be on the same disk as the PACTCONV program.

For example, to convert the 10th le on the memory card into a .SLK le called
MY FILE,
1. Type PACTCONV -p 10 MY_FILE at the cursor, and press 4 5.
This produces the le MY_FILE.SLK.
Enter

Developing Your Own Converter

The PACTCONV program is a simple, single solution to converting your data.

To help you develop your own custom converter, the source code for the
PACTCONV program is included on the disk.

Reading .SLK Files into a Spreadsheet

This section gives some tips on reading your .SLK les into some of the more
common spreadsheet packages
Microsoft Excel. During the File Open, set the File Type to *.SLK.
Borland Quattro Pro/Windows. .SLK les can be read directly with a normal
File Open.
Lotus 1-2-3W. Use the TRANSLATE utility (.SLK les are Multiplan les), or
at the DOS prompt, use the TRANSYLK program.

Error Code Descriptions

Error Code

Trouble Detected

G-62 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

2
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
29
30

No memory available for using function

You dened the output lename twice
Output lename was not dened
You dened the input lename twice
Input lename was not dened
Input lename does not exist
Input le cannot be closed due to wrong format
No valid input le
Output lename already exists
Output le was not opened
No correct usage of output le possible
Trouble while closing the output le
HP-IB write error
HP-IB read error
Insucient data received from HP-IB, perhaps an invalid PACT
data le was specied
File identication number (-p x) is wrong
HP-IB cannot be initialized
HP-IB address is not available
Incorrect HP-IB address was specied
Unknown options in command line
Too few arguments in command line
The lename extension is too long
Too few arguments in command line
The lename cannot be stored correctly due to DOS limitations
Extension in output lename detected
HP-IB timeout error - check connection
The received data le was empty
The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-63

Lotus, and 1-2-3 are U.S. registered trademarks of Lotus Development

Corporation.
Microsoft is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corp.
National Instruments is a U.S. registered trademark of National Instruments.
The program is copyrighted to the Hewlett-Packard Company 1993. All rights
are reserved.
G

G-64 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

The Result and Measurement Data Format

This section describes the format of the binary data, as a C-language data
structure.
#ifndef CURVEDATA
#define CURVEDATA
typedef short boolean;
/* Definition der ECL-Datenstrukturen */
#define
#define
#define
#define

GRAPH_TEXT_MAX
PACT_ID_LENGTH
PM_DUMMIES
MAX_NOV

struct scaledata
float
float
float
float
signed char
char
float
float
unsigned short
unsigned short
char
char
float
float
};

40
40
40
1001

{
min;
max;
minmin;
maxmax;
direction;
dummy;
delta;
factor;
preComma;
postComma;
autoScaleOnOff;
gridOnOff;
gridStep;
gridStart;

typedef struct scaledata scaledata;

struct scaling {
float x0, y0, y0dB, y0mW, y0Percent;
float x1, y1, y1dB, y1mW, y1Percent;
};
typedef struct scaling scaling;
struct coorddata {

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-65

unsigned short
unsigned short
};

x0, y0, x1, y1;

axisX0, axisY0, axisX1, axisY1;

typedef struct coorddata coorddata;

struct head {
char
char
char
char
char
char
char
};

cset;
height, width;
dummy;
hText [GRAPH_TEXT_MAX +
xText [GRAPH_TEXT_MAX +
yText [GRAPH_TEXT_MAX +
comment [GRAPH_TEXT_MAX

typedef struct head head;

struct retlossdata {
float
constTerm;
float
reference;
char
useConstTerm;
char
dummy;
};
typedef struct retlossdata retlossdata;
struct powermeter {
signed char
sense;
signed char
valid;
short
moduleType;
char
moduleName [20];
long
resultAddress;
char
autoRange;
char
range;
char
unit;
char
referenced;
float
atime;
float
wavelength;
float
power;
char
continuous;
char
zeroOnOff;
char
dummy [PM_DUMMIES];
};
typedef struct powermeter powermeter;

G-66 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

10];
10];
10];
+ 10];

struct instrumentInfo {
boolean attiOption;
boolean msibOption;
boolean pactOption;
boolean option4;
boolean option5;
boolean option6;
boolean option7;
boolean option8;
boolean option9;
boolean option10;
boolean dosmode;
char
serialNumber [22];
char
productNumber [22];
char
calibrationDate [22];
char
blockNumber [22];
};

typedef struct instrumentInfo instrumentInfo;

struct marker {
float
wavelength;
float
power;
};
typedef struct marker marker;
struct powerDefMinMax {
unsigned short def, min, max;
};
typedef struct powerDefMinMax powerDefMinMax, attenDefMinMax;
struct waveDefMinMax {
unsigned long def, min, max;
};
typedef struct waveDefMinMax
waveDefMinMax, timeDefMinMax,
power03DefMinMax, modulationDefMinMax;
struct indexDefMinMax {
long
def, min, max;
};

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-67

typedef struct indexDefMinMax indexDefMinMax;

struct sweep {
waveDefMinMax
waveDefMinMax
waveDefMinMax
indexDefMinMax
indexDefMinMax
unsigned long
waveDefMinMax
waveDefMinMax
unsigned long
timeDefMinMax
timeDefMinMax
timeDefMinMax
long
unsigned short
boolean
boolean
boolean
};

start;
stop;
step;
index;
rounds;
roundIndex;
center;
span;
points;
dwell;
stepTime;
time;
direction;
power;
marker;
powerSearch;
manual;

typedef struct sweep sweep;

struct date {
char
year;
char
month;
char
day;
char
dummy;
};
typedef struct date date;
struct time {
char
hour;
char
minute;
char
second;
char
dummy;
};
typedef struct time time;
struct power03 {
unsigned long

hwValue;

G-68 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

/* Normal Power Mode (only OPT003) */

unsigned long
power03DefMinMax
char
char

swValue;
dmm;
unit;
dummy;

/* Powervalue on Display */

typedef struct power03 power03;

struct power {
unsigned short
unsigned short
powerDefMinMax
char
char
}

hwValue;
swValue;
dmm;
unit;
dummy;

/* Power in the Attenuation Mode (OPT003) */

/* Powervalue on Display */

typedef struct power power;

struct atten {
unsigned long
unsigned long
attenDefMinMax
char
char
};

/* Attenuation in mdBm (OPT003) */

hwValue;
swValue;
dmm;
unit;
state;

typedef struct atten atten;

struct modulation {
unsigned long
modulationDefMinMax
char
char
};

/* when modulation ON */
/* here is the frequency in Hz */

freq;
dmm;
state;
unit;

typedef struct modulation modulation;

struct curve {
char
char
char
instrumentInfo
float
unsigned long
marker

chksum;
dummy;
serialNumber [40];
instrumentInfo;
measValue [MAX_NOV];
count;
marker1;

/* your HP8168 Serial number */

/* the real measurement values */
/* how many values */

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-69

marker
sweep
powermeter
powermeter
retlossdata
char
power03
power
atten
modulation
date
time
};

marker2;
sweep;
lpwm;
lpwmAdd;
retloss;
powerState;
power03;
power;
atten;
modulation;
date;
time;

/* info about sweep parameters */

typedef struct curve curve;

struct curvedataType {
char
chksum;
char
dummy1;
char
pactID [PACT_ID_LENGTH];
long
version;
char
filename [30];
scaledata
xScale;
scaledata
yScale;
char
yUnit [6];
float
yScaleFactor;
scaling
scaling;
coorddata
cdData;
head
head;
unsigned short whatToPrint;
char
whatToPrintString [30];
char
logoOnOff;
char
infoOnOff;
char
markerOnOff;
char
dummy2;
retlossdata
rlData;
powermeter
lpwmA;
powermeter
lpwmB;
curve
curve;
};
typedef struct curvedataType curvedataType, *curvedata;
#endif

G-70 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Backdating Information

The software described in this manual comes as standard with the tunable laser
source. Previously this software was sold, either as option 001, or as part of
a bundle under the name HP 81600 Scalar Device Analysis System Series 100
Passive Component Test System.
References to the bundled system have been removed from the manual. The
table below shows the correspondence between the bundles and the possible
measurements, with the relevant section.
Bundle, Test and Section Cross Reference
System 100 Bundle
Tests
Section
E4325A 1-channel loss test set Loss Measurement 2
1280nm - 1330nm
PC connector types
E4326A 1-channel loss test set Loss Measurement 2
1500nm - 1550nm
PC connector types
E4327A 1-channel loss test set Loss Measurement 2
1280nm - 1330nm
pigtails
E4328A 1-channel loss test set Loss Measurement 2
1500nm - 1550nm
pigtails
E4329A 2-channel loss test set Loss Measurement 2
1280nm - 1330nm
Ratio Measurement 4
PC connector types

The Passive Component Test (PACT) software G-71

E4330A
E4331A
E4332A
G

E4333A
E4334A

Bundle, Test and Section Cross Reference (continued)

System 100 Bundle
Tests
2-channel loss test set
Loss Measurement
1500nm - 1550nm
Ratio Measurement
PC connector types
2-channel loss test set
Loss Measurement
1280nm - 1330nm
Ratio Measurement
pigtails
2-channel loss test set
Loss Measurement
1500nm - 1550nm
Ratio Measurement
pigtails
1-channel loss/return loss test set Loss Measurement
1280nm - 1330nm
Return Loss Measurement
PC connector types
1-channel loss/return loss test set Loss Measurement
1500nm - 1550nm
Return Loss Measurement
PC connector types

G-72 The Passive Component Test (PACT) software

Section
2
4

2
4
2
4
2
3
2
3

Index

Index
A

AC Power Supply, A-2

AC Power Supply Cable, A-2
Actual Setting, 3-1, 3-2, 5-11
ADC, 3-5
Analog Output, 2-9, A-9
ANSI MC 1.1, 4-1
Assistance, ii
Attenuation, 5-22
Changing, 5-22
Limits, 5-23
Setting, 2-9
Attenuation Mode, 2-8, 2-9, 5-23,
5-24, 5-25
Attenuator Mode, 2-10
Att Softkey, 2-9
Automatic -Sweep, 2-6. See also
-Sweep, Automatic
Automatic Realignment, 3-7
Auto ranging (power meter), G-5,
G-15, G-28
Auto Softkey, 2-6
Autotransformer, A-3
AVA, A-8
AVAILABLE, A-8
Averaging
Sweep cycles, G-6, G-16, G-29
Averaging time (power meter), G-5,
G-15, G-28

Banner. See Header

Base Wavelength, 2-3. See also 0
Battery
Replacing, A-4
BDATA query, 5-40
Binary data
Format, 5-41
Transfer over HP-IB, 5-40

Cable
HP-IB, B-7
Optical, B-6
Power, A-2
Cal. Data, 3-5
Calibration
Date, 3-4
Laser, viii
Cancel Softkey, 1-8
Capital Letters (when Programming),
4-5
Case Sensitivity, 4-5
Centronics
Interface converter. See Interface
converter
Certication, ii
Clear Softkey, 1-8
Close softkey, 1-5
*CLS, 5-7, 5-12, 6-3
Coherence Control, 2-13, 5-33, 5-34,
5-37, 5-38
Index-1

Index

Uncalibrated Power, 5-33, 5-34

Coherence Controlled Output
Setting Power, 2-13
Commands. See Messages
Comment
Editing text. See Editing text
Common Commands, 5-5
CONDition Register, 5-29. See also
Operation Status, Questionable
Status
Connector Interface, A-9, B-3, B-5
Replacing, A-9
Connectors, 1-1
Continuous Wave Output, 2-8. See
also CW Output
Cont Softkey, 2-7
Cooling, A-6
Coupling Ratio. See Loss Ratio
Crosstalk. See Loss Ratio
c (Speed of Light), 2-3, 5-28
CW Output, 2-8, 5-19, 5-20, 6-10
cycles, G-6, G-16, G-29
cycles, -Sweep, 2-5

Data Keys, 1-6

Date, 5-36, 5-37
Setting, 3-4
Date Softkey, 3-4
dBm, 2-9
Declaration of Conformity, C-10
Def.All softkey, G-6, G-15, G-28
Default Setting, 3-1, 3-2, 5-11
-Sweep, 3-1
Default Softkey (Editing), 1-7
Default Softkey (Setting), 3-2
DeskJet. See Printer
Device Under Test. See DUT
df, 2-3, 2-4, 5-28
Editing, 2-4
DFB Lasers, 2-3
Index-2

Display
Burn-In, 3-3, 5-16
;DISPlay;ENABle, 5-16
;DISPlay;ENABle?, 5-16
DOSMODE command, 5-41
DOSMODE query, 5-41
dwell, -Sweep, 2-5
dwell time, G-6, G-16, G-29

Editing, 1-6
Cancelling, 1-8
Power meter parameters, G-6,
G-15, G-28
Problems, 1-8
EDIT Key, 1-6
ENABle Register, 5-29, 5-35. See also
Operation Status, Questionable
Status
Error Queue, 4-4, 5-7, 5-36
Errors, 5-36, F-1
*ESE, 5-7, 6-3
*ESE?, 5-8
*ESR?, 5-8, 6-3
EVENt Register, 5-29. See also
Operation Status, Questionable
Status
Event Status Enable Register, 5-5,
5-7, 5-8, 5-11
Event Status Register, 5-5, 5-7, 5-8,
5-10, 5-12, 5-13
EXC, 2-9
EXCESSIVE, 2-9
Excessive Power, 2-9, 5-30, 5-31

Firmware Revision, 3-4, 5-9

Freq Softkey, 2-11
Frequency
Modulation, 5-19
Modulation, Changing, 5-18

Index

Modulation, Limits, 5-19. See also

Parameters, Limits
Modulation, Setting, 1-10, 2-11,
6-8
Wavelength Oset, 2-3. See also
df
Front Panel, 1-2
Function Test, A-1
Fuse
Replacing, A-4

GP-IB. See HP-IB

Guide Organisation, x

Header
Editing text. See Editing text
Heat Chamber, A-8. See also
Stabilizing
Help Keys, 1-5
Heterodyning, 2-3
Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus, 4-1.
See also HP-IB
HP-IB, 4-1
Address, 3-4, 4-3, 5-11
Capabilities, 4-2
Command Summary, 5-2
Controller con ict, 5-40
Default Address, 3-4, 4-3
Interface Functional Subset, 4-2
Printer interface converter. See
Interface converter
Reference Works, 4-1
HP-IB Adapter, B-7
HP-IB Cable, B-7
HP-IB commands
PACT, 5-40
HP-IB Connector, A-10
HP-IB Interface, A-10
HP-IB Logic Levels, A-11

HPIB Softkey, 3-4

Humidity
Operating, A-6
HW-Interface, 3-5

*IDN?, 5-9, 6-2

IEC 625-1, 4-1
IEEE
Address, 4-1
IEEE 488.1-1987, 4-1
IEEE 488-1978, 4-1
IEEE 488.2-1987, 4-1, 5-5
Info Softkey, 3-4
Initial Inspection, A-1
Initializing, 5-30, 5-31, A-7
Input Queue, 4-3, 5-10
Clearing, 4-4
Insertion loss measurement. See Loss
measurement
Inspection
Initial, A-1
Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Engineers, Inc.
Address, 4-1
Interface Adapter, B-3, B-4, B-6, B-7

Labels
Laser Safety, vi
, 2-2. See also Wavelength
0 , 2-3, 5-28
Changing, 5-28
Setting, 2-3
-Sweep, 2-4, G-6, G-16, G-29. See
also Sweep
Automatic, 2-6, 2-7
Continuing, 2-7
delay, 2-5
HP-IB, 6-10
Manual, 1-12, 2-6
Index-3

Index

Manual, Setting Wavelength, 2-7

Pausing, 2-6
Power, 2-5
Power, Setting Maximum, 1-12,
2-5, 6-10
Repeating, 2-5
Setting Information, 3-1
Setting Up, 1-11, 2-5
Stopping, 2-6, 2-7
-Sweep Softkey, 2-2
Laser Board, 3-5
Laser Current, 5-17, 5-18, 6-8, 6-10
LaserJet. See Printer
Laser output
During zeroing, G-5, G-15, G-28
Laser Protection, 5-33, 5-34
Laser Safety, vi
Linewidth Measurements, 2-3
Local Softkey, 4-3
;LOCK, 5-17
Lock, 3-9
;LOCK?, 5-17
Long Form, 4-5

Maintenance
Agreements, ii
Manual -Sweep, 2-6. See also Sweep, Manual
Manual Softkey, 2-6
Manufacturer, 5-9
MAV, 4-4, 5-7, 5-12, 5-13
Memory Card Drive, 1-2
Message Available, 4-4. See also MAV
Message Exchange, 4-3
Reception, 4-3
Messages
Long Form, 4-5
Short Form, 4-5
Message Terminator
Input, 4-3, 4-5
Index-4

Output, 4-4
Mod/CW Softkey, 2-8
Model Number, 5-9
Modify Knob, 1-6
Modulated Output, 2-10, 5-19, 5-20,
6-8, 6-10
Setting Frequency, 2-11. See also
Frequency, Modulation, Setting
Setting Power, 2-11, 2-13. See also
Power, Modulation, Setting
Modulation Input, 2-13
Modulation Output, 2-12, 5-21, A-9
More Softkey, 3-3
Motor 1, 3-5
Motor 2, 3-5
Motor 3, 3-5
MSS, 5-7
Multimeter. See Power meter
Multiple Commands (in One Message),
4-5

Next Softkey (-Sweep), 2-7

Next Softkey (Setting), 3-2
nm/GHz Softkey, 2-2
n//mW Softkey, 2-9
Node (STATus), 5-29
NTRansition Register, 5-29, 5-35.
See also Operation Status,
Questionable Status
Numeric Keypad, 1-6

Oset Frequency, 2-3. See also df

On-Line Help, 1-5
*OPC, 5-7, 5-10
*OPC?, 5-7, 5-10
Operation Complete, 5-10
Operation Status, 5-12, 5-13, 5-29,
5-30, 5-35
Condition Register, 5-30

Index

Enable Register, 5-31

Event Register, 5-31
Negative Transition Register, 5-32
Positive Transition Register, 5-32
*OPT?, 5-10
Optical Cable, B-6
Optical Output, A-9
Optical Termination, A-9
Output
Enable, ix, 5-17, 6-8, 6-10
OUTPUT POWER Key, 2-8. See also
Power
Output Queue, 4-4, 5-10, 5-11, 5-14
;OUTPut[;STATe], 5-17, 6-8, 6-10
;OUTPut[;STATe]?, 5-18

P1

P1 Board, 3-5

P2

P2 Board, 3-5

PACT, 3-7, G-1
absolute reading, G-45
Autoscale, G-41
Averaging Sweep cycles, G-20
Cursor position, G-42
Deleting a le, G-57
DUT, G-8, G-18, G-30
Editing Filename, G-54
Editing text, G-41
Format Memory card, G-52
Help, G-2
HP-IB commands, 5-40
Ignore Termination, G-18
Introduction, G-1
Last Result, G-44, G-53
Loading measurements, G-56
Loss measurement, G-3
Loss measurement Reference, G-7
Loss Ratio measurement, G-25,
G-26, G-30

MeasDUT softkey, G-18, G-30

MeasREF softkey, G-17
MeasTRM softkey, G-18
Memory softkey, G-51
Output Power Setting, G-4, G-13,
G-26
Overwriting and inserting, G-42
PACTCONV command, G-61
PACTCONV program, G-62
Preview, G-44
Print, G-36, G-46
Printer Interface Converter, G-37
Printout Layout, G-39
Reference Re ection, G-17
Relative preview, G-45
Replacing lename, G-54
Result Data format, G-65
Return Loss measurement, G-12,
G-13, G-20
Save softkey, G-54
Saving measurements, G-51, G-53
Saving Selecting Result, G-53
Selecting characters, G-43
Selecting results, G-43
Setting softkey, G-38
Show softkey, G-36, G-43
SLK format, G-60
Starting, G-1
Sweep, G-20
X-scale, G-41
Y-scale, G-41
PaintJet. See Printer
Parallel printer
Interface converter. See Interface
converter
Parameters
Cannot Change, 1-8
Default Value, 1-7
Editing, 1-6
Limits, 1-8
Parser, 5-10
Index-5

Index

Starting, 4-4
Passive Component Test, 3-7, G-1
Password, 1-4, 3-9, 3-11
Pause Softkey, 2-6
Peak
!Peak Softkey, 3-7
Performance
Factors Aecting, 1-1
Pmax() Softkey, 3-6
Pmax!P Softkey, 2-5
PMF, A-9
Pmin (coherence control), 3-7
Polarization Maintaining Fiber, A-9
Power, 5-25, 6-10
Changing, 5-25
Coherence Control, Setting, 2-13
Limits, 5-26. See also Parameters,
Limits
Maximum as a function of
Wavelength, 3-6
Maximum, Setting, 3-7
Modulation, 5-25, 6-10
Modulation, Changing, 5-25
Modulation, Limits, 5-26. See also
Parameters, Limits
Modulation, Setting, 1-10, 2-11,
2-13, 6-8
Setting, 2-8, 6-8, 6-10
Setting Maximum for -Sweep,
1-12, 2-5, 6-10
Units, 2-9, 5-26, 6-8, 6-10
Power meter
Default values, G-6, G-15, G-28
Editing parameters, G-6, G-15,
G-28
parameters, G-5, G-15, G-28
Setting, G-5, G-15, G-28
Power Mode, 2-8, 2-10, 5-23, 5-24,
5-25
Power Supply
Requirements, AC, A-2
Index-6

PowMode Softkey, 2-8

Pref Softkey, 2-9
Prev Softkey (-Sweep), 2-7
Prev Softkey (Setting), 3-2
Printer Interface
Converter. See Interface converter
Printing History, ii
Programming
General, 4-5
PTRansition Register, 5-29, 5-35.
See also Operation Status,
Questionable Status

Queries. See Messages

Questionable Status, 5-12, 5-13, 5-29,
5-30, 5-35
Condition Register, 5-33
Enable Register, 5-33
Event Register, 5-34
Negative Transition Register, 5-34
Positive Transition Register, 5-35

*RCL, 5-11
Realignment
Automatic Realignment, 3-7
Recall Softkey, 3-2
Reference Wavelength. See 0
Relative Wavelength, 2-3
Remote Interlock Connector, 1-3
Repair
Laser, viii
Request Service, 5-6. See also RQS
Restoring. See Loading
Roadmap
Documentation, x
RQS, 5-6, 5-12, 5-13
*RST, 5-7, 5-11, 5-12

Index

Safety
Laser, vi
*SAV, 5-12
SCPI, 4-1
Long Form, 4-5
Reference Works, 4-2
Short Form, 4-5
Search Softkey, 1-5
Secure, 3-9
Select Softkey, 1-5
Self test, A-7
Selftest, 3-5, 5-14
Selftest. . . . . . . failed, 3-5
Selftest. . . . . . . passed, 3-5
SelfTst Softkey, 3-5
Serial Number, 3-4, 5-9
Serial Poll, 5-6
Service Request, 5-6. See also SRQ
Service Request Enable, 5-6
Service Request Enable Register,
5-5, 5-11, 5-12, 5-13
Servicing, viii
SetPWM softkey, G-5, G-15, G-28
SETTING Key, 3-1
Setting # of 5, 3-1. See also User
Setting
Settling time, G-6, G-16, G-29
Short Form, 4-5
Softkey, 1-2
[;SOURce];AM;INTernal;FREQuency,
5-18, 6-8
[;SOURce];AM;INTernal;FREQuency?,
5-19
[;SOURce];AM;SOURce, 5-19
[;SOURce];AM;SOURce?, 5-19
[;SOURce];AM;STATe, 5-20, 6-8, 6-10
[;SOURce];AM;STATe?, 5-20
[;SOURCE];MODOUT, 5-21
[;SOURCE];MODOUT?, 5-21
[;SOURce];POWer;ATTenuation, 5-22

[;SOURce];POWer;ATTenuation?, 5-22
[;SOURce];POWer;ATTenuation;AUTO,
5-23
[;SOURce];POWer;ATTenuation;AUTO?,
5-23
[;SOURce];POWer;ATTenuation;DARK,
5-24
[;SOURce];POWer;ATTenuation;DARK?,
5-24
[;SOURce];POWer[;LEVel][;IMM][;AMP],
5-25, 6-8, 6-10
[;SOURce];POWer[;LEVel][;IMM][;AMP]?,
5-25, 6-10
[;SOURce];POWer;UNIT, 5-26, 6-8,
6-10
[;SOURce];WAVElength[;CW;FIXED],
5-27, 6-8, 6-10
[;SOURce];WAVElength[;CW;FIXED]?,
5-27
[;SOURce];WAVElength;FREQuency,
5-28
[;SOURce];WAVElength;FREQuency?,
5-28
[;SOURce];WAVElength;REF;DISPlay,
5-28
[;SOURce];WAVElength;REFerence?,
5-28
Specications, ii, C-4
Speed of Light, 2-3, 5-28
*SRE, 5-12, 6-3
*SRE?, 5-13
SRQ, 5-6
Stabilizing, 5-33, 5-34, A-8
Standard Commands for
Programmable Instruments,
4-1. See also SCPI
Standard Event Status Enable
Register. See Event Status Enable
Register
Standard Event Status Register. See
Event Status Register
Index-7

Index

Standards
Traceability, ii
Standby mode, 3-4
StandBy Softkey, 3-3
start, -Sweep, 2-5
start wavelength, G-6, G-16, G-29
Status
Common, 5-5
Status Byte, 4-4, 5-5, 5-6, 5-7, 5-12,
5-13, 5-29, 5-31
STATus Nodes, 5-29
;STATus;OPERation;CONDition?, 5-30
;STATus;OPERation;ENABle, 5-31
;STATus;OPERation;ENABle?, 5-31
;STATus;OPERation[;EVENt]?, 5-31
;STATus;OPERation;NTRansition,
5-32
;STATus;OPERation;NTRansition?,
5-32
;STATus;OPERation;PTRansition,
5-32
;STATus;OPERation;PTRansition?,
5-32
;STATus;PRESet, 5-35
;STATus;QUEStionable;CONDition?,
5-33
;STATus;QUEStionable;ENABle, 5-33
;STATus;QUEStionable;ENABle?,
5-33
;STATus;QUEStionable[;EVENt]?,
5-34
;STATus;QUEStionable;NTRansition,
5-34
;STATus;QUEStionable;NTRansition?,
5-34
;STATus;QUEStionable;PTRansition,
5-35
;STATus;QUEStionable;PTRansition?,
5-35
*STB?, 5-13
step, -Sweep, 2-5
Index-8

step size, G-6, G-16, G-29

stop, -Sweep, 2-5
Stop Softkey, 2-6, 2-7
stop wavelength, G-6, G-16, G-29
Store Softkey, 3-2
Storing. See Saving
String. See Editing text
Subject Matter, ii
Suppression. See Loss Ratio
Sweep
Averaging, G-6, G-16, G-29
Parameters, G-6, G-16, G-29
repeating, G-6, G-16, G-29
Setting, G-6, G-16, G-29
SwpPara softkey, G-6, G-16, G-29
Syntax, 4-5
;SYSTem;DATe, 5-36
;SYSTem;DATe?, 5-36
;SYSTem;ERRor?, 5-36, 6-3
SYSTEM Key, 3-2
;SYSTem;TIMe, 5-37
;SYSTem;TIMe?, 5-37

Temperature
Cooling, A-6
Operating, A-6
Stabilizing, A-8. See also Stabilizing
Storing, A-6
Terminator. See Message Terminator
ThinkJet. See Printer
Time, 5-37
Setting, 3-5
Time Softkey, 3-5
;TRACe;CATalog?, 5-37
;TRACe[;DATa]?, 5-38
;TRACe;POINts?, 5-38
*TST?, 5-14
Tuning linearity, 5-38
Tuning Linearity, 6-12

Index

Uncalibrated Power
Coherence Control, 5-33, 5-34
Uncal Power Level, 5-37, 5-38
Uncal Power Level (coherence
control), 3-7
Units
Mnemonics, 5-1
Power, 2-9, 5-26, 6-8, 6-10
Programming, 4-5, 5-1
Unlock, 1-3, 3-10
User Setting, 3-1
Recalling, 3-2, 5-11
Storing, 3-2, 5-12

*WAI, 5-16
Warming Up, 1-9
Warranty, ii
Watts, 2-9
WAVEACT, 5-38, 6-12
Wavelength, 5-27
Changing, 5-27, 6-10

Limits, 5-27. See also Parameters,

Limits
Relative, 2-3, 5-28
Setting, 1-9, 2-2, 6-8
WAVELENGTH Key, 2-2
Wavelength step, G-6, G-16, G-29
Wavelength Sweep, 2-4. See also
-Sweep
W/dBm Softkey, 2-9

X-text
Editing text. See Editing text

Y-text
Editing text. See Editing text

Zeroing
Laser output, G-5, G-15, G-28
Zeroing (power meter), G-5, G-15,
G-28

Index-9